Request 1798 (accepted)

Overview

Request 1798 (accepted)

Tarball from new repository plus a few minor changes.

Created by Aloysius about 10 years ago
In state accepted
Package maintainer: pbleser

Submit tovid

Submit package home:Aloysius:branches:Multimedia / tovid to package Multimedia / tovid

tovid.changes Changed

​x
 
@@ -1,4 +1,12 @@
 -------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mon Apr  6 19:29:20 UTC 2015 - aloisio@gmx.com
+
+- Version 0.35.0
+  * minor changes
+  * moved project to github 
+- Dropped tovid-rpmlintrc
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
 Sat Mar 14 15:34:58 UTC 2015 - aloisio@gmx.com
 
 - Update to 0.35
​

tovid.spec Changed

@@ -1,123 +1,93 @@
 # vim: set ts=4 sw=4 et:
+#
+# Copyright (c) 2015 Luigi Baldoni <aloisio@gmx.com>
 # Copyright (c) 2005-2010 oc2pus
-# This file and all modifications and additions to the pristine
-# package are under the same license as the package itself.
 #
+# All modifications and additions to the file contributed by third parties
+# remain the property of their copyright owners, unless otherwise agreed
+# upon. The license for this file, and modifications and additions to the
+# file, is the same license as for the pristine package itself (unless the
+# license for the pristine package is not an Open Source License, in which
+# case the license is the MIT License). An "Open Source License" is a
+# license that conforms to the Open Source Definition (Version 1.9)
+# published by the Open Source Initiative.
+
 # Please submit bugfixes or comments to packman@links2linux.de
 
-%{!?python_sitelib: %global python_sitelib %(%{__python} -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib())")}
-%{!?python_sitearch: %global python_sitearch %(%{__python} -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib(1))")}
 
-Summary: Video conversion and DVD authoring tools
+%{!?python_sitelib: %global python_sitelib %(python -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib())")}
+%{!?python_sitearch: %global python_sitearch %(python -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib(1))")}
 Name: tovid
-Version: 0.35
-Release: 0.pm.1
-Group: Productivity/Multimedia/Video/Editors and Convertors
+Version: 0.35.0
+Release: 0
+Summary: Video conversion and DVD authoring tools
 License: GPL-2.0+
-Url: http://tovid.sourceforge.net/
-# http://tovid.googlecode.com/files/tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
-Source: tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
-Source90: %{name}-rpmlintrc
-BuildRoot: %{_tmppath}/%{name}-%{version}-%{release}-root
-%if %suse_version > 1110
-BuildArch: noarch
-%endif
-%py_requires
-BuildRequires: fdupes
+Group: Productivity/Multimedia/Video/Editors and Convertors
+Url: http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Tovid_Wiki
+Source: https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/releases/download/v0.35.0/tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
 BuildRequires: hicolor-icon-theme
 BuildRequires: python-devel
 BuildRequires: python-setuptools
 BuildRequires: txt2tags
 BuildRequires: update-desktop-files
+Requires: ImageMagick >= 6.0
+Requires: MPlayer
+Requires: bc
 Requires: binutils
 Requires: dvd+rw-tools
 Requires: dvdauthor >= 0.6.0
 Requires: ffmpeg
-Requires: ImageMagick >= 6.0
 Requires: lsdvd
 Requires: mjpegtools
-Requires: /usr/bin/mkisofs
-Requires: MPlayer
+Requires: mkisofs
 Requires: normalize
-%if %suse_version >= 1110
 Requires: python-base >= %{py_ver}
-%else
-Requires: python >= %{py_ver}
-%endif
-Requires: python-cairo
-Requires: python-imaging
-%if 0%{?suse_version} >= 1320
-Requires: python-wxGTK >= 3.0
-%else
-Requires: python-wxGTK < 3.0
-%endif
+Requires: python-tk
 Requires: sox
-Requires: transcode
-Requires: vcdimager
-Recommends:		libdvdcss2
-BuildRequires: dvd+rw-tools
-BuildRequires: dvdauthor >= 0.6.0
-BuildRequires: ffmpeg
-BuildRequires: ImageMagick >= 6.0
-BuildRequires: lsdvd
-BuildRequires: mjpegtools
-%if 0%{?suse_version} <= 1230
-BuildRequires: mkisofs
-%else
-BuildRequires: cdrkit-cdrtools-compat
-%endif
-BuildRequires: MPlayer
-BuildRequires: normalize
-BuildRequires: python-cairo
-BuildRequires: python-imaging
-%if 0%{?suse_version} >= 1320
-BuildRequires: python-wxGTK >= 3.0
-%else
-BuildRequires: python-wxGTK < 3.0
+Requires: tix
+Requires: tk
+Recommends: libdvdcss2
+Recommends: transcode
+BuildRoot: %{_tmppath}/%{name}-%{version}-build
+%py_requires
+%if 0%{?suse_version} > 1110
+BuildArch: noarch
 %endif
-BuildRequires: sox
-BuildRequires: transcode
-BuildRequires: vcdimager
 
 %description
-tovid is a suite of utilities designed to make VCD, SVCD, and DVD
+tovid is a suite of utilities designed to make DVD
 authoring a little less painful. tovid can create MPEG output
-from arbitrary video formats; other components in the suite can
-help you identify video files, generate graphical menus for DVD,
-and write the XML for authoring DVDs. Video files converted with
-tovid can subsequently be burned to a CD or DVD, using software
-that can create the appropriate file structure for VCD or SVCD
-such as k3b or dvdauthor.
+from arbitrary video formats, help you identify video files,
+generate graphical menus for DVD (animated or static),
+generate DVD directories with the appropriate file structure,
+and optionally burn them to disk.
 
 %prep
 %setup -q
 
 %build
-%__python setup.py build
+python setup.py build
 
 %install
-%__python setup.py install \
+python setup.py install \
 --prefix=%{_prefix} \
 --root=%{buildroot}
 
-%__rm -f "%{buildroot}%{_usr}/lib/tovid/.install.log"
+rm -f "%{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/.install.log"
+chmod +x %{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/set_chapters
+chmod +x %{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/tovid-init
 
 for x in tovidgui titleset-wizard; do
 %suse_update_desktop_file -r "$x" AudioVideo AudioVideoEditing
 done
 
-%fdupes -s "%{buildroot}"
-
-%clean
-%{?buildroot:%__rm -rf "%{buildroot}"}
-
 %files
 %defattr(-,root,root)
 %doc AUTHORS ChangeLog COPYING README
 %{_bindir}/tovid
 %{python_sitelib}/libtovid
 %{python_sitelib}/tovid-%{version}*
-%{_usr}/lib/tovid
+%{_prefix}/lib/tovid
 %{_datadir}/applications/tovidgui.desktop
 %{_datadir}/applications/titleset-wizard.desktop
 %{_datadir}/icons/*/*/apps/tovid.png

 
@@ -1,123 +1,93 @@
 # vim: set ts=4 sw=4 et:
+#
+# Copyright (c) 2015 Luigi Baldoni <aloisio@gmx.com>
 # Copyright (c) 2005-2010 oc2pus
-# This file and all modifications and additions to the pristine
-# package are under the same license as the package itself.
 #
+# All modifications and additions to the file contributed by third parties
+# remain the property of their copyright owners, unless otherwise agreed
+# upon. The license for this file, and modifications and additions to the
+# file, is the same license as for the pristine package itself (unless the
+# license for the pristine package is not an Open Source License, in which
+# case the license is the MIT License). An "Open Source License" is a
+# license that conforms to the Open Source Definition (Version 1.9)
+# published by the Open Source Initiative.
+
 # Please submit bugfixes or comments to packman@links2linux.de
 
-%{!?python_sitelib:  %global python_sitelib  %(%{__python} -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib())")}
-%{!?python_sitearch: %global python_sitearch %(%{__python} -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib(1))")}
 
-Summary:        Video conversion and DVD authoring tools
+%{!?python_sitelib:  %global python_sitelib  %(python -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib())")}
+%{!?python_sitearch: %global python_sitearch %(python -c "from distutils.sysconfig import get_python_lib; print(get_python_lib(1))")}
 Name:           tovid
-Version:        0.35
-Release:        0.pm.1
-Group:          Productivity/Multimedia/Video/Editors and Convertors
+Version:        0.35.0
+Release:        0
+Summary:        Video conversion and DVD authoring tools
 License:        GPL-2.0+
-Url:            http://tovid.sourceforge.net/
-# http://tovid.googlecode.com/files/tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
-Source:         tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
-Source90:       %{name}-rpmlintrc
-BuildRoot:      %{_tmppath}/%{name}-%{version}-%{release}-root
-%if %suse_version > 1110
-BuildArch:      noarch
-%endif
-%py_requires
-BuildRequires:  fdupes
+Group:          Productivity/Multimedia/Video/Editors and Convertors
+Url:            http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Tovid_Wiki
+Source:         https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/releases/download/v0.35.0/tovid-%{version}.tar.gz
 BuildRequires:  hicolor-icon-theme
 BuildRequires:  python-devel
 BuildRequires:  python-setuptools
 BuildRequires:  txt2tags
 BuildRequires:  update-desktop-files
+Requires:       ImageMagick >= 6.0
+Requires:       MPlayer
+Requires:       bc
 Requires:       binutils
 Requires:       dvd+rw-tools
 Requires:       dvdauthor >= 0.6.0
 Requires:       ffmpeg
-Requires:       ImageMagick >= 6.0
 Requires:       lsdvd
 Requires:       mjpegtools
-Requires:       /usr/bin/mkisofs
-Requires:       MPlayer
+Requires:       mkisofs
 Requires:       normalize
-%if %suse_version >= 1110
 Requires:       python-base >= %{py_ver}
-%else
-Requires:       python >= %{py_ver}
-%endif
-Requires:       python-cairo
-Requires:       python-imaging
-%if 0%{?suse_version} >= 1320
-Requires:       python-wxGTK >= 3.0
-%else
-Requires:       python-wxGTK < 3.0
-%endif
+Requires:       python-tk
 Requires:       sox
-Requires:       transcode
-Requires:       vcdimager
-Recommends:        libdvdcss2
-BuildRequires:  dvd+rw-tools
-BuildRequires:  dvdauthor >= 0.6.0
-BuildRequires:  ffmpeg
-BuildRequires:  ImageMagick >= 6.0
-BuildRequires:  lsdvd
-BuildRequires:  mjpegtools
-%if 0%{?suse_version} <= 1230
-BuildRequires:  mkisofs
-%else
-BuildRequires:  cdrkit-cdrtools-compat
-%endif
-BuildRequires:  MPlayer
-BuildRequires:  normalize
-BuildRequires:  python-cairo
-BuildRequires:  python-imaging
-%if 0%{?suse_version} >= 1320
-BuildRequires:  python-wxGTK >= 3.0
-%else
-BuildRequires:  python-wxGTK < 3.0
+Requires:       tix
+Requires:       tk
+Recommends:     libdvdcss2
+Recommends:     transcode
+BuildRoot:      %{_tmppath}/%{name}-%{version}-build
+%py_requires
+%if 0%{?suse_version} > 1110
+BuildArch:      noarch
 %endif
-BuildRequires:  sox
-BuildRequires:  transcode
-BuildRequires:  vcdimager
 
 %description
-tovid is a suite of utilities designed to make VCD, SVCD, and DVD
+tovid is a suite of utilities designed to make DVD
 authoring a little less painful. tovid can create MPEG output
-from arbitrary video formats; other components in the suite can
-help you identify video files, generate graphical menus for DVD,
-and write the XML for authoring DVDs. Video files converted with
-tovid can subsequently be burned to a CD or DVD, using software
-that can create the appropriate file structure for VCD or SVCD
-such as k3b or dvdauthor.
+from arbitrary video formats, help you identify video files,
+generate graphical menus for DVD (animated or static),
+generate DVD directories with the appropriate file structure,
+and optionally burn them to disk.
 
 %prep
 %setup -q
 
 %build
-%__python setup.py build
+python setup.py build
 
 %install
-%__python setup.py install \
+python setup.py install \
     --prefix=%{_prefix} \
     --root=%{buildroot}
 
-%__rm -f "%{buildroot}%{_usr}/lib/tovid/.install.log"
+rm -f "%{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/.install.log"
+chmod +x %{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/set_chapters
+chmod +x %{buildroot}%{_prefix}/lib/tovid/tovid-init
 
 for x in tovidgui titleset-wizard; do
     %suse_update_desktop_file -r "$x" AudioVideo AudioVideoEditing
 done
 
-%fdupes -s "%{buildroot}"
-
-%clean
-%{?buildroot:%__rm -rf "%{buildroot}"}
-
 %files
 %defattr(-,root,root)
 %doc AUTHORS ChangeLog COPYING README
 %{_bindir}/tovid
 %{python_sitelib}/libtovid
 %{python_sitelib}/tovid-%{version}*
-%{_usr}/lib/tovid
+%{_prefix}/lib/tovid
 %{_datadir}/applications/tovidgui.desktop
 %{_datadir}/applications/titleset-wizard.desktop
 %{_datadir}/icons/*/*/apps/tovid.png
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/PKG-INFO -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/PKG-INFO Changed

 
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
-Metadata-Version: 1.0
+Metadata-Version: 1.1
 Name: tovid
-Version: 0.35
-Summary: UNKNOWN
+Version: 0.35.0
+Summary: A suite of tools for making video DVDs
 Home-page: http://tovid.wikia.com/
-Author: Eric Pierce
-Author-email: wapcaplet88@gmail.com
+Author: grepper
+Author-email: grepper@gmail.com
 License: GPL
-Description: UNKNOWN
-Platform: UNKNOWN
+Download-URL: https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/
+Description: A suite of tools for making video DVDs
+Platform: Linux
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/README -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/README Changed

 
@@ -45,5 +45,3 @@
     http://tovid.wikia.com/
 tovid-users discussion group:
     http://groups.google.com/group/tovid-users
-tovid IRC channel:
-    irc.freenode.org, channel #tovid
​

tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/docs/src/en/tovid.html Added

@@ -0,0 +1,1918 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN">
+<HTML>
+<HEAD>
+<META NAME="generator" CONTENT="http://txt2tags.org">
+<TITLE>tovid manual</TITLE>
+</HEAD><BODY BGCOLOR="white" TEXT="black">
+<CENTER>
+<H1>tovid manual</H1>
+</CENTER>
+
+
+<HR NOSHADE SIZE=1>
+
+
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc1">Name</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc2">Description</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc3">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc4">Configuration</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc5">Command:gui</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc6">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc7">Command:titlesets</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc8">Command:disc</A>
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc9">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc10">General Options</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc11">Menu style</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc12">Thumbnail style</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc13">Slideshows</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc14">Burning the disc</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc15">Advanced usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc16">Menu Style</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc17">Thumbnail Style</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc18">Dvdauthor options</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc19">Usage notes</A>
+ </UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc20">Command:mpg</A>
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc21">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc22">Basic options</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc23">Advanced options</A>
+ </UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc24">Command:id</A>
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc25">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc26">Options</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc27">Examples</A>
+ </UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc28">Command:dvd</A>
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc29">Usage</A>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc30">Options</A>
+ </UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc31">Command:chapters</A>
+ <UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc32">Examples</A>
+ </UL>
+ <LI><A HREF="#toc33">CONTACT</A>
+ </UL>
+
+
+<HR NOSHADE SIZE=1>
+
+
+<A NAME="toc1"></A>
+<H1>Name</H1>
+
+
+tovid: Make DVDs from video files
+
+
+<A NAME="toc2"></A>
+<H1>Description</H1>
+
+
+tovid is a command-line tool for creating DVDs. It can encode your video
+files to DVD-compliant MPEG format, generate simple or complex DVD menus,
+author and burn a ready-to-watch DVD, with just a few shell commands. A
+graphical interface is also provided to make the process even easier.
+
+
+NOTE: As of tovid 0.35, the legacy scripts makemenu and makexml
+have been removed and no longer appear in this manpage.
+All of their functions and more can be done with the 'tovid disc' command,
+(todisc script). See Command:disc and the <A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com">wiki</A>
+for more info.
+
+
+Also note that as of tovid 0.32, this is the only manual page provided by tovid.
+There is now a single executable frontend to all functionality in the suite, so
+if you were expecting to find manpages for todisc, idvid, makempg
+and their kin, they can all be found in the tovid manpage you are reading now.
+And yes, this makes for a pretty large manual page. If you are viewing this
+manpage from the command-line man utility, which normally pages through the
+less utility, you can skip to a section by searching with the / key,
+followed by a ^ to match the given section name. For example, to skip to
+the mpg command, type /^Command:mpg. See man less for more on how
+to navigate.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc3"></A>
+<H1>Usage</H1>
+
+
+tovid COMMAND [OPTIONS]
+
+
+Where COMMAND is one of the following:
+
+
+ Main Commands
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>disc</DT><DD>
+ Encode, make menus, author, burn. (was todisc. See Command:disc)
+<DT>gui</DT><DD>
+ Start the tovid GUI (was todiscgui. See Command:gui)
+<DT>titlesets</DT><DD>
+ A GUI wizard for multiple titlesets. (new: See Command:titlesets)
+</DL>
+
+
+ Helper Commands
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>mpg</DT><DD>
+ Encode videos to MPEG format (was tovid. See Command:mpg)
+<DT>dvd</DT><DD>
+ Author and/or burn a DVD (was makedvd. See Command:dvd)
+<DT>id</DT><DD>
+ Identify one or more video files (was idvid. See Command:id)
+<DT>chapters</DT><DD>
+ A GUI using mplayer for setting chapter points. It will return a string of
+ chapter points to the terminal, in a format recognized by 'tovid disc'
+ (todisc) or by 'tovid gui', for the -chapters option.
+</DL>
+
+
+The OPTIONS differ for each command; run tovid &lt;command&gt; with no
+further arguments to get help on a command, and what options it expects.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc4"></A>
+<H1>Configuration</H1>
+
+
+Two configuration files are created the first time you run tovid:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>~/.tovid/preferences</DT><DD>
+ Defines working directory for all scripts.
+ You can define the output directory for makempg here.
+ The 'ffmpeg' executable can be set here: ffmpeg or avconv (TOVID_FFMPEG)
+<DT>~/.tovid/tovid.ini</DT><DD>
+ Includes command-line options that should be passed to the various
+ tovid sub-commands. Note: each sub-command has its own section,
+ starting with the line [sub-command], for example:
+
+<PRE>
+ [disc]
+ ; -no-warn
+ -static
+ -no-ask
+</PRE>
+
+</DL>
+
+
+Edit these files if you wish to change your configuration.
+
+
+The following environment variables are also honoured:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ TOVID_HOME (directory containing preferences: ~/.tovid)
+ TOVID_WORKING_DIR (working directory for all scripts).
+ TOVID_OUTPUT_DIR (output directory for the makempg script).
+ TOVID_FFMPEG_CMD (the 'ffmpeg' executable to use: ffmpeg or avconv)
+</PRE>
+
+
+These will override 'TOVID_HOME', 'WORKING_DIR', 'OUTPUT_DIR',
+and 'TOVID_FFMPEG' if set in ~/.tovid/preferences.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc5"></A>
+<H1>Command:gui</H1>
+
+<A NAME="toc6"></A>
+<H1>Usage</H1>
+
+
+tovid gui [OPTIONS]
+
+
+tovid gui starts the graphical user interface (GUI) for tovid. This is
+the easiest way to start creating DVDs with tovid. The optional arguments
+OPTIONS are any option used by todisc ('tovid disc') which will save
+entering it manually, OR the full path to a saved script from the GUI.
+You can also combine these, but the script must be the FIRST option
+directly after tovid gui . (This option to save the contents of your
+project allows you to use it as a bash script later, or to reload the
+project to continue working with it at another time.)
+
+
+tovid gui will also take the option --position, which denotes the
+screen position that the GUI will start at, in the form '+X+Y', similar to
+this part of the Xorg -geometry string.
+
+
+All help is integrated in the form of tooltips. You can also see
+**Command:disc ** for more detail about the options. Note: if you wish to use
+a GUI to make multiple titlesets on the same DVD use *tovid titlesets*,
+which is a wizard that uses the the 'tovid gui. See *Command:titlesets*.
+
+
+Please note that although the interface may seem complex with so many options,
+you can create a fully functional DVD with only a few options on the opening
+tab of the GUI (select video files and an output name).
+
+
+<A NAME="toc7"></A>
+<H1>Command:titlesets</H1>
+
+
+tovid titlesets will assist in making a DVD with multiple titlesets. It can
+be started without any options, or you can feed it the path to a saved titleset
+script as an option. The option to save a script is also useful as the resulting
+script can be run later from a terminal.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc8"></A>
+<H1>Command:disc</H1>
+
+
+tovid disc creates a DVD file-system with optional menus, from a list of
+multimedia video files and their titles. As todisc can function as a master
+script, calling other scripts as it needs them, it is the easiest command line
+program for creating a DVD from start to finish, including automatically
+converting non-compliant videos and prompting to burn at completion. It can do
+animated menus, static thumbnail menus, text-only menus, or author with no menu.
+In addition, it can do slideshows, using images as input, and even combine
+slideshows with videos. It supports sub-menus for chapter breaks,
+configurable menu style, animated backgrounds and transparency effects.
+From simple (no menu) to complex (switched menus and titlesets), you should
+be able to do what you want with 'tovid disc'.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc9"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+<PRE>
+ tovid disc [OPTIONS] \
+ -files &lt;file list&gt; -titles &lt;title list&gt;
+ -out mydvd
+</PRE>
+
+
+For example:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -files File1.mpg File2.mpg File3.mpg \
+ -titles "Episode 1" "Episode 2" "Episode 3" \
+ -out Season_one
+</PRE>
+
+
+The number of -files and -titles must be equal, though if you do not
+include any titles tovid disc will use the basename of the included files
+as titles. If you are doing a slideshow or multiple slideshows, use
+-slides rather than -files for passing in the images. You may use
+-files and -slides more than once to create an ordering in a mixed
+slideshows/videos menu. See Slideshows part of Usage section, below.
+
+
+If the input files are not mpeg, you will have the option to auto-encode them.
+
+
+General Options
+
+
+At present there are 2 display arrangements or "templates":
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>A. (Default)</DT><DD>
+ Thumbs will be centred, and as large as space restraints allow.
+
+<DT>B. -showcase IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+ Produces an arrangement with small buttons on
+ the side and the showcase image/video in the centre. If no IMAGE or VIDEO
+ argument is supplied, the central thumb will be omitted.
+
+ Note: -textmenu, -quick-menu and -switched-menus are all types
+ of showcase style menus. See descriptions under Menu style section.
+</DL>
+
+
+The -titles arguments should be double or single quoted, or have the spaces
+backslash-escaped. Special characters (like ", !, *, &amp;, ?) may need to be
+backslash-escaped. To include a quoted string within a title, backslash-escape
+the quotes. These titles are used for labelling thumbnails on the main menu,
+and for the submenu title for that video. ( see also -submenu-titles )
+
+
+The -showcase styles can use longer titles than the default arrangement.
+With a showcase style, use: -showcase-titles-align west to give more space
+for the title, or use -showcase-titles-align east to allow titles of more
+than one line.
+
+
+The default style can only show about 16 characters (depending on the number
+of thumbs, and what -titles-font and -titles-fontsize is being used).
+If your titles are too long to fit in the label area, you may try using
+sub-menus, which can display longer titles, for example:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -submenus \
+ -files file1.mpg file2.mpg ... \
+ -titles "Short 1" "Short 2" \
+ -submenus \
+ -submenu-titles "Long Title One" "Long Title Two" \
+ -out foo
+ 
+</PRE>
+
+
+The -align argument will position both titles and thumbs either south,
+north east, west, southwest, northwest, southeast, northeast, subject to
+certain constraints of each arrangement. For example a showcase style with
+a showcase thumb can only do north|south|center.
+
+
+More Examples:
+
+
+A text-only menu:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -textmenu ...
+</PRE>
+
+
+No menu:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid -nomenu -files file1.mpg file2.mp4 "file 3.avi" -out mydvd
+</PRE>
+
+
+Titlesets
+
+
+A word should be mentioned here about titlesets, which is really just a
+hierarchy of menus. You need to use titlesets, for example, if you have videos
+of different resolutions, or otherwise want to arrange videos on separate menus.
+If you want to have titlesets you need to put all the options for each titleset
+menu you would like to have between -titleset and -end-titleset options.
+
+
+Additionally, for the main menu (the opening menu that will let you jump to
+each titleset), you need to put options between -vmgm and -end-vmgm.
+You do not use -files for the opening menu options (-vmgm), but you
+will need as many TITLES after -titles as you have menus.
+
+
+Any options outside the -titleset -end-titleset and -vmgm
+-end-vmgm areas will be global options applying to every titleset.
+If a global option is duplicated inside a -titleset or -vmgm area, the
+global option will be overridden.
+
+
+Note: you do not need titlesets for a single menu with chapter break menus, for
+that just use -submenus or -ani-submenus
+
+
+Example of using tovid disc with titlesets:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -static -out MY_DVD \
+ \
+ -titleset \
+ -files 1.mpg 2.mpg 3.mpg \
+ -titles "Title One" "Title Two" "Title Three" \
+ -end-titleset \
+ \
+ -titleset \
+ -files 4.mpg 5.mpg \
+ -titles "Title Four" "Title Five" \
+ -background foo.jpg \
+ -showcase bar.png \
+ -end-titleset \
+ \
+ -vmgm \
+ -titles "Season One" "Season Two" \
+ -background bg.jpg \
+ -bgaudio foo.mp3 \
+ -titles-fontsize 20 \
+ -end-vmgm
+</PRE>
+
+
+See also -titleset and -vmgm
+
+
+Slideshows
+
+
+You can also use tovid disc to make slideshows. This can either be a single
+slideshow, or multiple slideshows on the same menu.
+Remember to use -slides rather than -files for passing in the
+images. Images can be any filetype that imagemagick supports: for example
+JPEG, PNG, GIF, TGA BMP etc. For a single slideshow do not use -titles:
+use -menu-title to set the slideshow title.
+
+
+For a single slideshow the default is an animated menu that transitions from
+slide to slide. The default transition type is 'crossfade', which fades each
+slide into the next and loops back to the first slide at the end. If instead
+you use -static, then a static 'polaroid stack' menu of all the slides is
+created, with a single spumux'ed button for navigating with the enter key. You
+may have to experiment to find out which DVD remote button advances the slides.
+Try the 'next chapter'(skip ?) button and the play or enter buttons.
+If you want to limit the number of slides in the menu to a subset of all files
+entered with -slides, then use -menu-slide-total INT. Be sure to use
+a long enough audio file for -bgaudio or set -menu-length so the menu
+is long enough to support the slides plus transitions.
+
+
+You can also put multiple slideshows on one menu. To do this, use
+-slides IMAGES for each slideshow desired. You can even mix videos
+with slideshows by using -files -slides -titles multiple times.
+
+
+Example of a single slideshow with an animated menu with transitions:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" -slides images/*.jpg \
+ -menu-slide-total 20 -slide-transition crossfade -bgaudio slideshow.wav \
+ -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+
+Example of multiple slideshows on one menu:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+ -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+ -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+ -slides photos/november/*.jpg \
+ -tile3x1 -rotate -5 5 -5 -align center \
+ -bgaudio background.wav \
+ -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+
+Example of mixed videos and slideshows:
+
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+ -files fall_fair.mov \
+ -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+ -files harvest.mpg \
+ -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+ -titles "Fall Fair" "September" "Harvest" "October" \
+ -background autumn.png \
+ -bgaudio bg.mp3 \
+ -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+
+See the other slideshow options in the Slideshows options section.
+
+
+Encoding Options
+
+
+These are options for reencoding your non-compliant videos. They are passed
+directly to the tovid mpg command which is invoked by tovid disc when
+non-compliant files are found. For details, see the Command:mpg section.
+Here is a list of possible options you can pass:
+ -config, -ntscfilm, -dvd-vcd, -half-dvd, -kvcd,
+ -kvcdx3, -kvcdx3a, -kdvd, -bdvd, -704, -normalize,
+ -amplitude, -overwrite, -panavision, -force, -fps,
+ -vbitrate, -quality, -safe, -crop, -filters,
+ -abitrate, -priority, -deinterlace, -progressive,
+ -interlaced, -interlaced_bf, -type, -fit, -discsize,
+ -parallel, -mkvsub, -autosubs, -subtitles, -update,
+ -mplayeropts, -audiotrack, -downmix, -ffmpeg, -nofifo,
+ -from-gui, -slice, -quiet,
+ -fake, -keepfiles
+
+
+<A NAME="toc10"></A>
+<H2>General Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-keep-files, -keepfiles</DT><DD>
+ Keep all intermediate/temporary files (helps with debugging)
+<DT>-no-ask | -noask</DT><DD>
+ Skip all interactive questions. No preview, automatic re-encoding with
+ tovid if needed, no interactive option to use background video for bgaudio.
+<DT>-no-warn, -nowarn</DT><DD>
+ Don't pause after outputting warning or info messages
+<DT>-jobs</DT><DD>
+ By default, tovid disc starts a parallel job for each processor
+ detected. With this option you can manually set the number of jobs. For
+ example if you have a computer with 2 CPUs you can set "-jobs 1" to keep
+ one processor free for other things. At present this applies to the time
+ consuming imagemagick loops: you will notice a substantial speedup now if
+ you have a multi-cpu system.
+<DT>-grid</DT><DD>
+ Show a second preview image with a grid and numbers that will help in finding
+ coordinates for options that might use them, like -text-start
+<DT>-no-confirm-backup</DT><DD>
+ This option is for when your DVD contains images for a slideshow.
+ Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature. Todisc is
+ unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+ and backup your images, as you would with any beta software. Todisc
+ will prompt you to backup your files normally. If you have already backed
+ up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+
+==Options==
+
+<DT>-ntsc</DT><DD>
+ 720x480 output, compatible with NTSC standard (default)
+<DT>-pal</DT><DD>
+ 720x576 output, compatible with PAL standard
+<DT>-submenus</DT><DD>
+ Create a sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: no sub-menus)
+<DT>-ani-submenus</DT><DD>
+ Create an animated sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: not
+ animated)
+<DT>-no-menu | -nomenu</DT><DD>
+ With this option todisc will just create a DVD file system, ready for
+ burning, with NO MENU, just the supplied video files. These do not need
+ to be compliant, as non-compliant files will be encoded as usual. The
+ -out option is not required. Each video will be a chapter unless
+ -chapters OPTION is passed. The -chapters option is a number
+ indicating the chapter interval in minutes, or a HH:MM:SS string
+ indicating chapter points. See -chapters
+<DT>-encode-only</DT><DD>
+ This option was originally meant for the GUI, to allow it to be used for
+ just encoding rather than making a DVD structure. But it works well from
+ the command line as well as it has the added advantage that you can input
+ a list of files. Remember any makempg ('tovid mpg') options you use will
+ be passed on to the makempg script when encoding.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc11"></A>
+<H2>Menu style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-showcase IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+ If used without an argument, use showcase style without a central thumb.
+ This is a different arrangement of images for the menu: small thumbnails
+ go at left (and right) side of screen, with a larger image in the centre.
+ Maximum of 10 videos. If the provided argument is a video file, the
+ central thumb will be animated (regardless of whether -static is part
+ of the command line). Only 4:3 or 16:9 videos and images are accepted for
+ for the showcase file: if not one of these todisc will assume it is the
+ aspect ratio as the videos in the titleset.
+<DT>-textmenu, -text-menu NUM</DT><DD>
+ If used without an argument, create a textmenu out of the supplied titles
+ The optional argument specifies how many titles are in the 1st column,
+ i.e. giving 4 titles and using "-textmenu 2" would make 2 columns of 2
+ titles. The default is to put all titles up to 13 in the first column
+ before starting a second column. Maximum: 2 columns and 26 titles.
+ Note that column 2 titles are justified to the left unless you add
+ -edge-justify to the command line. The menu will be static if no video
+ files are supplied with either -background or -showcase options.
+<DT>-quick-menu</DT><DD>
+ If you are using ffmpeg 0.8 or newer you can use this option. This will
+ make a very quick menu by using ffmpeg instead of imagemagick.
+ There are two choices: you can either use '-showcase IMAGE|VIDEO' or
+ '-background VIDEO'. There are no fancy effects like -wave
+ or -rotate available for it, but it is extremely fast. It will be a
+ text-menu style of menu, with no video thumbs, and a central showcase
+ IMAGE(static) | VIDEO(animated).
+ (i) see -bg-color if you are not using a -background and want to
+ change the default. (default is dark blue for -quick-menu arrangements). )
+ (ii) Note: todisc will still work with 'vhooks' if you have an old ffmpeg
+ with vhooks compiled in.
+
+ Specifying the IMAGE|VIDEO argument to -showcase is mandatory for this
+ style of menu, unless used in conjunction with -switched-menus
+ in which case the videos passed with -files automatically become the
+ showcase videos. If -quick-menu is used in combination with
+ -switched-menus it really speeds up an otherwise time consuming process.
+
+ Example:
+<PRE>
+ -quick-menu -showcase /home/grepper/showcase.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+ See -switched-menus for example of making switched menus with
+ -quick-menu
+
+<DT>-bg-color, -bg-colour</DT><DD>
+ The color to use for the menu background. (default: ntsc-safe black)
+ Note: use a color a great deal darker than you want, as it appears quite
+ a bit lighter in the video version. You can use hexadecimal ('#ffac5f')
+ notation or named colors ('Lime'). convert -list color will show them.
+ See <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php">colors</A> for more details.
+<DT>-submenu-bg-color, -submenu-bg-colour</DT><DD>
+ The color to use as background for the submenu(s).
+ (default: ntsc-safe black) See -bg-color
+<DT>-static</DT><DD>
+ Main menu will consist of static thumbnail links. (default: animated)
+ If you use a video for -showcase or -background then it will still be
+ a 'moving' menu, in spite of the static buttons. This option also does
+ double duty for the -switched-menus option, and will create static
+ "switched" images.
+ See also -switched-menus
+<DT>-background IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+ Menu background. This can be a image file or an video file. If it is a
+ video file the background will be animated. Pick a file of correct aspect
+ ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to 4:3 aspect ratio.
+ It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+<DT>-submenu-background IMAGE</DT><DD>
+ Submenu background. This can be only be an image file. Pick a file of
+ correct aspect ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to
+ 4:3 aspect ratio. It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+<DT>-menu-title</DT><DD>
+ Title for the root menu - may be longer than thumbnail labels
+ Also if you use \n in the title, you can use multi line titles, but you
+ would need to adjust -title-fontsize to something smaller than default
+ for example:
+
+<PRE>
+ $ tovid disc ... -menu-title "A\nMultilined\nTitle" -title-fontsize 24
+</PRE>
+
+<DT>-title-font, -menu-font FONT</DT><DD>
+ Font to use for titles, either by ImageMagick font name (ex., "Arial") or
+ explicit pathname (ex., "/full/path/to/arial.ttf"). To see a complete
+ list of acceptable ImageMagick font names, run convert -list type, and
+ refer to the leftmost column
+<DT>-title-fontsize, -menu-fontsize</DT><DD>
+ Font size for main menu - best to -preview if you use this
+<DT>-submenu-font</DT><DD>
+ Font to use for the sub-menu main titles. See -title-font
+<DT>-submenu-fontsize</DT><DD>
+ Font size for the sub-menu main titles
+<DT>-menu-fade ['BACKGROUND DURATION']</DT><DD>
+ Fade the menu in and out The background will fade in first, then title (and
+ mist if called for), then the menu thumbs. The fadeout is in reverse
+ order. 'BACKGROUND DURATION' is an integer denoting the amount of time
+ the background will play before the menu begins to fade in. This can allow
+ you to do a 'transition' to the menu: if you supply a -background VIDEO it
+ will play for the indicated time before the menu fades in. Leave the
+ optional argument empty (just -menu-fade) to get the default behavior
+ of showing the background for 1 second before fading the menu in. To
+ disable the fadeout portion, use '-loop inf'. See also:
+ -transition-to-menu and -loop
+<DT>-transition-to-menu</DT><DD>
+ This option goes with the -menu-fade option above, which must be
+ enabled for it to have effect. It is a convenience option for animated
+ backgrounds: the background will become static at the exact point the
+ thumbs finish fading in. This menu does not loop unless you pass
+ -loop VALUE. See also: -loop
+<DT>-bgaudio, -bg-audio* FILE</DT><DD>
+ An file containing audio for the main menu background. For static menus
+ the default is to use 20 seconds of audio. You can change this using the
+ -menu-length option.
+<DT>-submenu-audio FILE(S)</DT><DD>
+ List of files for sub-menu audio backgrounds. If one file is given, then
+ it will be used for all sub-menus. Otherwise the number given must equal
+ the number of submenus, though the keyword "none" in this list may be used for
+ silence. See also -submenu-length
+<DT>-titleset . . . -end-titleset</DT><DD>
+ If you have more than one titleset, put options for each titleset between
+ -titleset and -end-titleset. A separate menu will be created that
+ can be accessed from the main menu (VMGM). You can create this main menu
+ using the -vmgm -end-vmgm options. See -vmgm below and
+ TITLESET paragraph opening Usage section.
+<DT>-vmgm . . . -end-vmgm</DT><DD>
+ The VMGM menu is the root menu when you use titlesets.
+ Put your VMGM menu options between -vmgm and -end-vmgm.
+ You only need -titles "Titleset One title" "Titleset Two title"
+ . . . , and not -files.
+ Any other options can be used, but the menu will be a textmenu style by
+ default. Hint: use -showcase IMAGE/VIDEO to create a fancier
+ VMGM menu.
+<DT>-no-vmgm-menu, -no-vmgm</DT><DD>
+ This will skip the creation of a VMGM ( root menu ) for titlesets. The DVD
+ will start with the first titleset. You can not use this option unless also
+ using -quick-nav as you would not have a way to get to other titlesets.
+<DT>-skip-vmgm</DT><DD>
+ Start DVD from the first titleset instead of the VMGM ( root ) menu.
+<DT>-switched-menus, -switched-menu</DT><DD>
+ This will make a "switched menu": there will be a central image where the
+ showcase image would go, and text menu titles along the menu edge where
+ textmenu titles go. As you select a video title with the down or up arrow
+ on your DVD remote, the image in the centre will change to the image or
+ video made from that selected video. Do not use -showcase IMAGE/VIDEO
+ with this option.
+
+ This can be a time consuming process for making animated menus as you need
+ to make a separate menu for each video provided with -files. The
+ process can be greatly sped up by using -quick-menu in conjunction with
+ this, though you will lose fancy options like -rotate and -wave.
+
+ Note that if you want to just have a static rather than an 'animated'
+ image, add -static to the command line.
+
+ Example for using with -quick-menu:
+<PRE>
+ -switched-menus -quick-menu
+</PRE>
+
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc12"></A>
+<H2>Thumbnail style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-titles-font FONT</DT><DD>
+ Display thumbnail or textmenu titles in the given font
+<DT>-titles-fontsize POINTS</DT><DD>
+ Font size to use for thumbnail or textmenu titles
+<DT>-thumb-shape</DT><DD>
+ normal|oval|vignette|plectrum|arch|spiral|blob|star|flare
+ Apply a shaped transparency mask to thumbnail videos.
+ These "feathered" shapes look best against a plain background (or used
+ in conjunction with -thumb-mist [COLOR]). For this rectangular
+ semi-transparent misted background for each thumb: see -thumb-mist.
+ Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+ $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+ command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+ (i.e ~/.tovid/masks/tux.png becomes -thumb-shape tux)
+ No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+<DT>-thumb-frame-size INT</DT><DD>
+ The size (thickness) of the thumb frames in pixels. This will also set the
+ thickness of the raised "frame" of thumbs when you use -3d-thumbs.
+ See also -showcase-frame-size and -thumb-frame-color
+<DT>-thumb-frame-color, -thumb-frame-colour COLOR</DT><DD>
+ The color of frames for video thumbnails. Use hexadecimal or named colors
+ notation. Remember to quote if using hexadecimal! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+<DT>-3d-thumbs, -3dthumbs</DT><DD>
+ This will give an illusion of 3D to the thumbnails: dynamic lighting on
+ rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs. Try it !
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc13"></A>
+<H2>Slideshows</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-slides IMAGES</DT><DD>
+ Use -slides IMAGES to pass in images for a slideshow. The default is
+ to make an animated menu of the slides, moving from one slide to the
+ next. If you use -static, a 'polaroid stack' montage is created. This
+ composites the slides onto the background in 'random' locations with random
+ rotations. -slides IMAGES can be used multiple times if you wish to
+ make a menu with multiple slideshows. You can also make a menu
+ of mixed videos and slideshows by using -slides IMAGES, and -files
+ VIDEOS multiple times. For such a menu, the number of -titles
+ needs to match the number of -files passed in plus the number of
+ slideshows. (Each time you use -slides counts as one title.) To use
+ a transition between the slides, use -slide-transition
+ crossfade|fade. See -slide-transition -menu-slide-total
+
+<DT>-menu-slide-total INT</DT><DD>
+ Use INT number of the slides that were passed in with -slides
+ to make the animated or static slide menu. The length of the menu is
+ determined by 1) -menu-length NUM if given, and by 2) the length
+ of the audio from -bgaudio. For submenu slideshows, it is determined
+ by 1) -submenu-length NUM if given, and by 2) the length of the
+ audio from -submenu-audio FILE(S).
+
+<DT>-submenu-slide-total INT</DT><DD>
+ This option is the same as -menu-slide-total except that it is
+ for submenu slideshows.
+
+<DT>-slide-transition crossfade|fade [crossfade]</DT><DD>
+ The type of fade transition between slides in a animated slide menu. Be
+ sure the menu length is long enough to support the 1 second transitions
+ between the slides. The length is determined by 1) the length of the
+ -bgaudio AUDIO 2) the length given with -menu-length NUM. For submenu
+ slideshows, it is determined by 1) -submenu-length NUM if given, and
+ by 2) the length of the audio from -submenu-audio FILE(S).
+
+ See -menu-slide-total , -bgaudio , -menu-length ,
+ -submenu-length, and -submenu-audio.
+
+ The 'crossfade' transition fades from one slide to another. The 'fade'
+ transition fades in and out from and to black. If you don't use this
+ option, the default is to use a 'crossfade' transition.
+
+<DT>-slideshow-menu-thumbs FILES</DT><DD>
+ Use the FILES instead of the 1st image in each slideshow as the
+ thumb that shows on the menu. This option is for multiple slideshows
+ or mixed slideshow/video menus only.
+
+<DT>-slides-to-bin FILES</DT><DD>
+ FILES will be resized to 640x480 using a 'box' filter - this
+ is called 'binning'. It will reduce the 'signal to noise' ratio for the
+ image in the animated slide menu. Use this if you get some unwanted
+ effects for certain images, such as pixels shifting in what should be a
+ static image. See also -slides-to-blur and -slide-border
+
+<DT>-slides-to-blur FILES</DT><DD>
+ FILES will be blurred a small amount - which will help on
+ slides that still have noise even after 'binning' with -slides-to-bin.
+ The default blur is 0x0.2 - you can increase this with
+ -slide-blur ARG. See also -slides-to-bin and -slide-border
+
+<DT>-slide-blur VALUE or LIST of VALUES [0x0.2]</DT><DD>
+ The argument to use for blurring files. It will be passed to
+ imagemagick: convert -blur ARG. The format of the arg is {radius}x{sigma}
+ and the default is 0x0.2. Using values between 0x0.1 and 0x0.9 is probably
+ the best range. Use a single value for all, or a list to have a different
+ blur for each file passed with -slides-to-blur. You must pass in
+ -files-to-blur FILES to use this option. Blurring can help 'noise'
+ problems in the video. See also -slides-to-bin and -slide-border
+
+<DT>-slide-border WIDTH [100]</DT><DD>
+ Pad the slides with a border for the animated slide menu. The default
+ without using an argument is 100. Using this option can also solve some
+ noise/ringing effects if used alone or in conjunction with 'binning'
+ (-slides-to-bin) or blurring (-slides-to-blur).
+
+<DT>-slide-frame WIDTH [12]</DT><DD>
+ Frame the slides for the animated slideshow menu. The default width
+ without using an argument is 12. See also -slide-frame-color
+
+<DT>-slide-frame-color, -slide-frame-colour</DT><DD>
+ The color of the slide frame if passing -slide-frame. The default if
+ you don't use this option is a color-safe white: rgb(235,235,235).
+
+<DT>-showcase-slideshow</DT><DD>
+ If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+ the animated slideshow as a showcase video. It will be composed of slides
+ from each slideshow in the menu. The thumb for each slideshow button will
+ be static. If you used with a mixed menu of videos and slideshows, then
+ the video thumbs WILL be animated, so you may wish to use -static or
+ -textmenu with the option in that case. If you want to use the
+ **-switched-menus option with a mixed menu leave this option out.
+
+<DT>-background-slideshow, -bg-slideshow</DT><DD>
+ If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+ the animated slideshow as a background video. See -showcase-slideshow
+ for additional details.
+
+<DT>-no-confirm-backup</DT><DD>
+ Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature. Todisc is
+ unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+ and backup your images, as you would with any beta software. Todisc
+ will prompt you to backup your files normally. If you have already backed
+ up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+ See General Options
+
+<DT>-use-dvd-slideshow <A HREF="FILE">CONFIG</A></DT><DD>
+ If you pass this option without an argument, tovid will use the
+ dvd-slideshow program to create the animated slide menu, assuming you have
+ this program installed. The optional argument is the dvd-slideshow
+ configuration file - if you don't use this argument tovid will create it
+ for you. If you want to use the 'Ken Burns effect' - then the
+ configuration file argument is required. Note: the configuration file will
+ override many of the above options for slideshows.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc14"></A>
+<H2>Burning the disc</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-burn</DT><DD>
+ Prompt to burn the DVD directory on completion.
+
+<DT>-device</DT><DD>
+ Device to use for the burning program [ /dev/dvdrw ]
+
+<DT>-speed</DT><DD>
+ The speed to use for burning the disc.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc15"></A>
+<H2>Advanced usage</H2>
+
+<H3>Options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-menu-length</DT><DD>
+ The desired animated main menu length in seconds
+<DT>-submenu-length</DT><DD>
+ The desired submenu length. This will also affect the length of submenu
+ audio for static submenus. (Assuming that -submenu-audio was passed in).
+ The default is to use 10 seconds of audio for static menus.
+<DT>-submenu-stroke COLOR</DT><DD>
+ The color for the sub-menu font shadow
+<DT>-submenu-title-color, -submenu-title-colour</DT><DD>
+ The fill color used for sub-menu title fonts
+<DT>-submenu-titles</DT><DD>
+ You can supply a list of titles here for sub-menus without the length
+ restrictions found in thumb titles. Must equal number of videos
+<DT>-chapters [ NUM | CHAPTER POINTS in HH:MM:SS ]</DT><DD>
+ The number of chapters for each video (default: 6) OR
+ the actual chapter points in HH:MM:SS format.
+ Chapter points will be used for generating the submenu thumbs, and for
+ seeking with your DVD player. You can pass in just one value that will
+ be used for all videos, or supply a list of values (number of chapters)
+ or time code strings.
+
+ If you just pass an integer for 'number of chapters', then tovid will
+ make the chapter points for you by dividing the video length by the number
+ you supply. If using the -no-menu option, the INT passed in will be
+ the chapter interval in minutes, rather than the above formula.
+
+ If passing HH:MM:SS format you need to pass the string of chapter points for
+ each video and each string should have comma separated values.
+ Additionally, the first chapter should always start at 00:00:00 as
+ dvdauthor will add that if it is not there already.
+
+ To get your time codes, you can play your videos in mplayer and press 'o'
+ to see them on-screen. I have found these to be very accurate in my short
+ tests. For greater frame accuracy you could try loading the file in
+ avidemux and find the time codes for the frames you want.
+
+ If passing grouped chapters you need to join the chapters from all the
+ videos in a group with a '+' separator. If you want to skip creating
+ chapters for a video in the group use '0' for its chapters.
+
+ Note: chapters for grouped videos should probably be passed in using the
+ above HH:MM:SS format. (Arbitrary chapters using just an INT for the # of
+ chapters is not guaranteed to work reliably in all cases for grouped videos
+ at the moment.)
+
+ Example for passing just number of chapters ( 4 videos ):
+<PRE>
+ -chapters 5 2 4 8
+</PRE>
+
+
+ Example of passing chapter points ( 4 videos ):
+<PRE>
+ -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45 \
+ 00:00:00,00:04:25.623,00:09:12,00:15:51 \
+ 00:00:00,00:05:10,00:13:41,00:18:13.033 \
+ 00:00:00,00:15:23.342,00:26:42.523
+</PRE>
+
+
+ Example of passing grouped chapters using the '+' separator:
+<PRE>
+ -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45+00:04:23,00:09:35 \
+ 00:00:00... etc.
+</PRE>
+
+
+<DT>-chapter-titles LIST</DT><DD>
+ If you are using submenus, you can pass a list of titles for the
+ chapters. Each title must be quoted, and the number of titles given
+ must equal the total number of chapters for all videos. In other words
+ if you use -chapters 4 6 8 , you must give 18 chapter titles, in the same
+ order that the videos were passed in. Note: if you are passing in options
+ on the command line to the 'tovid disc' GUI, you must repeat the option
+ -chapter-titles for each video, accompanied by its respective chapter
+ titles. (you can also choose to use this syntax for the todisc script.)
+
+<DT>-chapter-font FONT</DT><DD>
+ Use FONT as the font for submenu chapters.
+
+<DT>-chapter-fontsize SIZE</DT><DD>
+ Use SIZE as the pointsize for the chapters font.
+<DT>-chapter-color COLOR</DT><DD>
+ The color for the chapters font.
+<DT>-chapter-stroke COLOR</DT><DD>
+ The color for the chapters font shadow
+
+<DT>-seek NUM | "NUM1 NUM2 NUM3 . . ."</DT><DD>
+ Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails (default: 2.0 seconds)
+ If a quoted string of values matching the number of videos is used, then
+ each video can use a different seek value
+ If using switched menus, the -seek value(s) will be used to generate
+ the showcase image that displays on switching to another video choice with
+ the up/down arrow keys.
+<DT>-fast-seek</DT><DD>
+ Use faster seek method for ffmpeg. This is not as accurate as the default
+ method, and may produce grey frames.
+<DT>-frame-safe Instead of seeking and then outputting one frame for</DT><DD>
+ previews and static menus, output 9 frames and choose the largest. Not
+ frame accurate (may be as much as 9 frames off), but safer. Choose this
+ if you are getting grey frames/thumbnails with some videos. You can also
+ use it to try to get the 'best' frame. This option
+ has no effect on submenus at present.
+<DT>-showcase-seek NUM</DT><DD>
+ Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails for showcase video
+ (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT>-bgvideo-seek, -bg-video-seek NUM</DT><DD>
+ Seek to NUM seconds before generating images for background video
+ (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT>-bgaudio-seek, **-bg-audio-seek NUM</DT><DD>
+ Seek to NUM seconds before generating audio for bgaudio
+ (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT>-group N VIDEO1 VIDEO2 . . .</DT><DD>
+ Allow grouping videos in dvdauthor.xml, so they will play sequentially as
+ a group. The videos passed in after the 'N' will be grouped with the 'Nth'
+ video. Example:
+
+<PRE>
+ -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+
+ will group these 3 videos with the 2nd video given with -files, so that
+ they will play sequentially as one title. Only one thumbnail and/or title
+ will appear on the menu for the group: it will be made from the 1st video
+ in the group. In the above example if you passed:
+<PRE>
+ -files foo.mpg bar.mpg baz.mpg -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+ then the group will consist of bar.mpg 2.mpg, 3.mpg and 4.mpg, and only the
+ title and/or thumbnail for bar.mpg will appear in the menu. You can use
+ -group more than once for multiple groups. Be sure to quote video
+ filenames if they contain spaces.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc16"></A>
+<H2>Menu Style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-menu-title-geo north|south|east|west|center [south]</DT><DD>
+ The position of the menu title. You may need to use -align as well if
+ you don't want your title covering other parts of your menu. See
+ -align
+<DT>-menu-title-offset OFFSET (+X+Y)</DT><DD>
+ Move menu title by this offset from its N|S|E|W|Center position. You
+ may need to use -align as well if you don't want your title covering other
+ parts of your menu. See -align
+<DT>-button-style line|rect|text|text-rect [line]</DT><DD>
+ The style of button that you will see when you play the DVD.
+ "line" style underlines the title, "rect" draws a rectangle around the
+ thumb when you select it in the DVD player, "text" highlights the video
+ title text, and "text-rect" draws a rectangle around the title
+ text.
+<DT>-title-color, -title-colour COLOR</DT><DD>
+ Color to use for the main menu title. For list of supported colors do:
+ convert -list color. HTML notation may be used: "#ff0000". See:
+ <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php">http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php</A>
+<DT>-title-stroke COLOR</DT><DD>
+ Shadow color for the main menu's title font. Use "none" for transparent
+ outline (see title-color). Note: this is not a -stroke in the sense that
+ imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow (the font is drawn twice). To get
+ a true imagemagick stroke see -title-font-deco
+<DT>-title-font-deco, -title-fontdeco "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"</DT><DD>
+ Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+ ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+ outlines, gradient fills, and many others. See Usage notes
+<DT>-titles-stroke COLOR</DT><DD>
+ Shadow color for the thumb or textmenu video titles font. Use "none" for
+ transparent outline (see -titles-color). Note: this is not a -stroke
+ in the sense that imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow
+ (the font is drawn twice). To get a true imagemagick stroke,
+ see -titles-font-deco
+<DT>-titles-font-deco, -titles-fontdeco "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"</DT><DD>
+ Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+ ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+ outlines, gradient fills, and others. See Usage notes for more info.
+<DT>-highlight-color, -highlight-colour</DT><DD>
+ Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to navigate.
+<DT>-select-color, -select-colour</DT><DD>
+ Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to select.
+<DT>-text-mist</DT><DD>
+ Put a semi-transparent misted background behind the text for the menu's
+ title, just slightly larger than the text area.
+<DT>-text-mist-color, -text-mist-colour COLOR</DT><DD>
+ Color of the mist behind the menu's title (see title-color).
+<DT>-text-mist-opacity</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of the mist behind the menu's title - see -opacity
+<DT>-title-opacity</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of the menu title text
+<DT>-titles-opacity</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of the text for video titles
+<DT>-submenu-title-opacity</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of the text for submenu menu titles
+<DT>-chapter-title-opacity</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of the text for submenu chapter titles
+<DT>-menu-audio-fade</DT><DD>
+ Number of sec to fade given menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds)
+ If you use -menu-audio-fade 0 then the audio will not be faded.
+<DT>-submenu-audio-fade</DT><DD>
+ Number of secs to fade sub-menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds).
+ See -menu-audio-fade
+<DT>-intro VIDEO</DT><DD>
+ Use a introductory video that will play before the main menu.
+ At present it must be a DVD compatible video at the correct resolution etc.
+ Only 4:3 aspect is supported: 16:9 will give unexpected results.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Style options specific to showcase/textmenu arrangements</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-text-start N</DT><DD>
+ This option is for -textmenu menus. The titles will start at the Nth
+ pixel from the top of the menu ( Y axis ).
+<DT>-title-gap N</DT><DD>
+ This option is for -textmenu menus. The gap is the space between
+ titles vertically ( Y axis ).
+<DT>-rotate DEGREES</DT><DD>
+ Rotate the showcase image|video clockwise by DEGREES.
+ (default: if used without options, the rotate will be 5 degrees). Note:
+ this will not turn a portait image into a landscape image!
+<DT>-showcase-geo GEOMETRY</DT><DD>
+ The position of the showcase image. ( +X+Y position )
+ For example: -showcase-geo +300+200
+<DT>-wave default|GEOMETRY</DT><DD>
+ Wave effect for showcase image|video. Alters thumbs along a sine wave using
+ GEOMETRY. (default: no wave)
+ "default" will produce a wave arg of -20x556, which
+ produces a gentle wave with a small amount of distortion.
+ See: <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave">http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave</A> if you want
+ to try other values.
+<DT>-showcase-shape egg|oval|plectrum|arch|spiral|galaxy|flat-tube|normal</DT><DD>
+ Apply a shaped transparency mask to showcase videos or images.
+ Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+ $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+ command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+ No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+<DT>-showcase-framestyle none|glass</DT><DD>
+ For -showcase-* style template only
+ "none" will use the default frame method, using "convert -frame . . ."
+ "glass" will use mplayer to make frames, which gives an interesting
+ animated effect to the frames, and can be much faster ( especially if you
+ don't use -rotate or -wave as thumbs will not need to be processed
+ again after mplayer spits them out. Note: you need to be using either
+ -showcase IMAGE or -showcase VIDEO for this "frame style" to work.
+<DT>-showcase-frame-size PIXELS</DT><DD>
+ The size of the showcase frame. This value will be used for both width and
+ height for the 'thickness' of the frame. This will also set the thickness
+ of the raised "frame" of the showcase thumb when you use -3d-showcase.
+ See also -thumb-frame-size and -showcase-frame-color
+<DT>-showcase-frame-color, -showcase-frame-colour PIXELS</DT><DD>
+ The color of the showcase frame. Use hexadecimal or named colors notation.
+ Remember to quote! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+<DT>-3d-showcase, -3dshowcase</DT><DD>
+ This will give an illusion of 3D to the showcase thumb: dynamic lighting on
+ rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs. Try it !
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc17"></A>
+<H2>Thumbnail Style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-user-thumbs IMAGE(S)</DT><DD>
+ Supply your own images for menu buttons, rather than relying on todisc to
+ generate them from the video. They must be the same aspect ratio as the
+ videos in the titleset (4:3 or 16:9), as todisc will resize them without
+ checking and cropping. There must be on image for each thumb that will be
+ displayed on the menu (ie. one thumb for each video in a titleset).
+<DT>-opacity [0-100] (default 100)</DT><DD>
+ Opacity of thumbnail videos as a percentage (no percent sign).
+ Anything less than 100(%) is semi-transparent. Not recommended with dark
+ backgrounds.
+<DT>-thumb-blur, -blur NUM</DT><DD>
+ The amount of feather blur to apply to the thumb-shape. The default is 1.0
+ which will more or less keep the shape and produces transparency at the
+ edges. Choose float or integer values between 0.1 and 2.0. 3D thumbs are
+ set to a tiny blur, so this option doesn't affect the -3dthumbs option.
+<DT>-showcase-blur NUM</DT><DD>
+ The amount of 'feather' blur to apply to the showcase image/video. Choose
+ values between 0.1 and 2.0. This option has no effect on -3d-showcase.
+ See -thumb-blur for more info.
+<DT>-align DIRECTION</DT><DD>
+ This will align thumbs/titles in DIRECTION, which is a compass direction
+ as used by imagemagick: ie. north|south|east|west|northeast|northwest etc.
+ If -align south then menu title will align north, unless you manually
+ set one or both of -menu-title-geo or -menu-title-offset.
+ Only -align north|south|center has any effect on showcase with thumb,
+ or with the default montage arrangement of central thumbs. The most
+ apparent changes with be with textmenu, though with 2 column arrangements
+ only the north* and south* changes will show an effect.
+
+ Diagram:
+<DT> . northwest north northeast .</DT><DD>
+<DT> . .</DT><DD>
+<DT> . west center east .</DT><DD>
+<DT> . .</DT><DD>
+<DT> . southwest south souteast .</DT><DD>
+<DT>-thumb-mist [COLOR]</DT><DD>
+ Use a mist behind thumbnails. The optional argument is the color of the
+ mist. This option helps with contrast. Be sure to set the font color
+ to an appropriate color if using a colored mist, and/or use a bold font.
+<DT>-titles-color, -titles-colour COLOR</DT><DD>
+ Color to use for the thumb or textmenu titles. If your titles are not
+ clear enough or look washed out, try using a -titles-stroke that
+ is the same color as used with -titles-color (see -title-color)
+<DT>-showcase-titles-align west|east (default: center [centre])</DT><DD>
+ The default is to center the text above the thumbnails. This option will
+ align the titles either to the left (west) or right (east). Aligning west
+ gives more space to the titles. Aligning east also does so, and as well
+ will facilitate using \n in your titles to achieve multi line titles.
+<DT>-tile-3x1, -tile3x1</DT><DD>
+ Use a montage tile of 3x1 instead of the usual 2x2 for 3 videos
+ ie.
+
+ [movie1] [movie2] [movie3] instead of:
+
+ [movie1] [movie2]
+
+ [movie3]
+
+ This option only comes into play if the number of videos supplied equals 3
+ Otherwise it will be silently ignored. Not used for -showcase-* style.
+<DT>-tile-4x1, -tile4x1</DT><DD>
+ Same as -tile-3x1 above, except use tile of 4x1. (one row of 4 videos)
+<DT>**-thumb-columns 3|4</DT><DD>
+ Same as -tile-3x1 and tile-4x1** above, except it accepts either '3'
+ (1 row of 3 thumbs), or '4' (one row of 4 thumbs) as an argument. This
+ alternative was added to help compact the gui layout.
+<DT>-rotate-thumbs DEGREE LIST ( list of degrees, one for each thumb )</DT><DD>
+ Rotate thumbs the given amount in degrees - can be positive or negative.
+ There must be one value for each file given with -files.
+ If the values are not the same distance from zero, the thumbs will be of
+ different sizes as images are necessarily resized *after* rotating. With
+ the default montage template - this will also resize the titles; with the
+ showcase template the titles will remain the same size. Example:
+
+<PRE>
+ -rotate-thumbs -10 10 -10 10 -10 (for 5 files)
+</PRE>
+
+ **Note: this option will not turn a portrait image into a landscape image!
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc18"></A>
+<H2>Dvdauthor options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-loop PAUSE</DT><DD>
+ Pause in seconds at end of menu. Use "inf" if you wish indefinite pause.
+ Note: using "inf" with -menu-fade will disable the fadeout portion of
+ the fade. (default: "inf" for static menu, 10.0 seconds for animated.)
+<DT>-playall</DT><DD>
+ This option will create a button on the main menu that will allow going
+ right to the 1st title and playing all videos in succession before
+ returning to the main menu. If doing titlesets you can use this within
+ the -vmgm ... -end-vmgm options to allow playing ALL titlesets.
+ (If you want also to have a playall button in each titleset you could use
+ this option between each -titleset ... -end-titleset option or put
+ it outside of the vmgm and titlset options as a global option.
+<DT>-videos-are-chapters</DT><DD>
+ A button will be made on the main menu for each video, which you can use as
+ a chapter button. Selecting any video will play them all in order
+ starting with the selected one.
+<DT>-chain-videos NUM | N1-NN</DT><DD>
+ Without options this will chain all videos together so they play
+ sequentially without returning to the main menu, except for the last, which
+ will return. You can also specify which videos you want to behave this way
+ by number or by a range. ( ie. -chain-videos 1 2 4-6 ).
+<DT>-subtitle-lang "lang1 lang2 . . ."</DT><DD>
+ This allows selectable subtitles in the DVD, assuming you have optional
+ subtitles muxed into your videos. Use 2 character language codes.
+<DT>-audio-channel "Video1_track Video2_track Video3_track . . ."</DT><DD>
+ "VideoN_track" is the track number to use in a multi-track (multi-language)
+ mpeg: usually something like -audio-channel "1 0 1". The 1st track is
+ 0, 2nd is 1 . . . etc. If the tracks are 0. English 1.French, then the
+ above would make French the audio language on Video1 and Video3, and
+ English the audio language on Video2. You can check the mpeg with
+ "mplayer -v . . .".
+<DT>-audio-lang LANGUAGE CODES</DT><DD>
+ Identify the audio tracks on the DVD. These language codes are used for
+ each video in the titleset. When you use the audio button on your DVD
+ remote the language name is displayed. Example: -audio-lang en fr
+<DT>-aspect 4:3|16:9</DT><DD>
+ This will output a &lt;video aspect WIDTH:HEIGHT /&gt; tag for the dvdauthor
+ xml file. It will affect all videos in the titleset. Example:
+
+<PRE>
+ -aspect 16:9
+</PRE>
+
+<DT>-widescreen nopanscan|noletterbox [nopanscan]</DT><DD>
+ This will output a &lt;video widescreen=nopanscan /&gt; tag (for example)
+ for the dvdauthor xml file. It will affect all videos in the titleset. Use
+ in conjunction with -aspect if your dvd player is cropping your videos.
+ Example:
+
+<PRE>
+ -aspect 16:9 -widescreen
+</PRE>
+
+<DT>-quick-nav</DT><DD>
+ This option will allow navigation of a menu with more than one titleset by
+ using the left and right arrow keys of your DVD remote. When you press
+ this key the highlight will go the next or previous title. If you are at
+ the end of a titleset the right key will go to the next titleset. If you
+ are at the beginning of a titleset, the left key will go to the previous
+ titleset. If no next or previous titleset it will cycle to the end or
+ beginning of the titlesets.
+<DT>-outlinewidth, -outline-width WIDTH</DT><DD>
+ For spumux outlinewidth variable. If there is a large gap between words in
+ a text button, this option may help.
+<DT>-video-pause PAUSE (single value or list)</DT><DD>
+ The pause in seconds after playing a video title. This is useful for
+ slideshows: the 'slide' will remain on the screen for this length of time.
+ If you have grouped videos you should probably not pause the videos that
+ have a grouped title after it, but instead see -grouped-video-pause.
+ Note: if you provide a list of values they must be one for each video.
+<DT>-group-video-pause PAUSE (single value or list)</DT><DD>
+ The pause in seconds after a grouped video plays. If you wish to pause
+ after the whole group finishes, then only use a value greater than zero
+ for the last video in the group. If providing a list of values they must
+ equal the number of grouped videos.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc19"></A>
+<H2>Usage notes</H2>
+
+
+The argument given to various *-font options that set the font to use must be
+one of the fonts listed by the command 'convert -list type'. Please note that
+many of your installed fonts may not be available; if you want to maximize the
+number of fonts available to todisc, download and run
+<A HREF="http://www.cit.gu.edu.au/~anthony/anthony.html">Anthony Thyssen's</A>
+<A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/scripts/imagick_type_gen">imagick_type_gen</A>
+script and run it like this:
+imagick_type_gen &gt; ~/.magick/type.xml.
+If that doesn't work, try imagick_type_gen &gt; ~/.magick/type.mgk.
+
+
+Or you can specify a ttf font file directly to the *-font options if you don't
+want to install fonts to ImageMagick.
+
+
+The *-stroke options in todisc are not a stroke in the sense that ImageMagick
+uses the term, but rather a font shadow (the text is drawn twice) To get a
+truer Imagemagick -stroke try something like:
+-title-font-deco "-stroke black" (or -titles-font-deco "-stroke black"). The
+-fontdeco option is quite flexible and takes a lot of ImageMagick's
+convert options. Please refer to the tovid
+<A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Making_a_DVD_with_text_menus">wiki</A> and Anthony
+Thyssen's guide [<A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage">http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage</A>] for further explanation and examples.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc20"></A>
+<H1>Command:mpg</H1>
+
+
+tovid mpg converts arbitrary video files into (S)VCD/DVD-compliant
+MPEG format, suitable for burning to CD/DVD-R for playback on a
+standalone DVD player.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc21"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+
+tovid mpg [OPTIONS] -in INFILE -out OUTPREFIX
+
+
+Where INFILE is any multimedia video file, and OUTPREFIX is what
+you want to call the output file, minus the file extension. OPTIONS
+are additional customizations, described below.
+
+
+By default, you will (hopefully) end up with an NTSC DVD-compliant
+MPEG-2 video file; if you burn this file to a DVD-R, it should be
+playable on most DVD players.
+
+
+For example:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid mpg -in foo.avi -out foo_encoded</CODE></DT><DD>
+ Convert 'foo.avi' to NTSC DVD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+
+<DT><CODE>tovid mpg -pal -vcd foo.avi -out foo_encoded</CODE></DT><DD>
+ Convert 'foo.avi' to PAL VCD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc22"></A>
+<H2>Basic options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-v, -version</DT><DD>
+ Print tovid version number only, then exit.
+<DT>-quiet</DT><DD>
+ Reduce output to the console.
+<DT>-fake</DT><DD>
+ Do not actually encode; only print the commands (mplayer, mpeg2enc etc.)
+ that would be executed. Useful in debugging; have tovid give you the
+ commands, and run them manually.
+<DT>-ffmpeg</DT><DD>
+ Use ffmpeg for video encoding, instead of mplayer/mpeg2enc. Try this if
+ you have any problems with the default encoding method. Using this option,
+ encoding will be considerably faster. It can do almost everything that 
+ mpeg2enc does such as -filters and -subtitles by using a pipe from mplayer
+ though using these options will make encoding somewhat slower. The 
+ exceptions are some special options like -kvcd* -bdvd where you will still
+ need to use the default mpeg2enc option.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Television standards</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-ntsc</DT><DD>
+ NTSC format video (USA, Americas) (default)
+<DT>-ntscfilm</DT><DD>
+ NTSC-film format video
+<DT>-pal</DT><DD>
+ PAL format video (Europe and others)
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Formats</H3>
+
+
+Standard formats, should be playable in most DVD players:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-dvd</DT><DD>
+ (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) DVD-compatible output (default)
+<DT>-half-dvd</DT><DD>
+ (352x480 NTSC, 352x576 PAL) Half-D1-compatible output
+<DT>-svcd</DT><DD>
+ (480x480 NTSC, 480x576 PAL) Super VideoCD-compatible output
+<DT>-dvd-vcd</DT><DD>
+ (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VCD-on-DVD output
+<DT>-vcd</DT><DD>
+ (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VideoCD-compatible output
+</DL>
+
+
+Non-standard formats, playable in some DVD players:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-kvcd</DT><DD>
+ (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing video CD
+<DT>-kdvd</DT><DD>
+ (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+<DT>-kvcdx3</DT><DD>
+ (528x480 NTSC, 520x576 PAL) KVCDx3 specification
+<DT>-kvcdx3a</DT><DD>
+ (544x480 NTSC, 544x576 PAL) KVCDx3a specification (slightly wider)
+<DT>-bdvd</DT><DD>
+ (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) BVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+</DL>
+
+
+See <A HREF="http://kvcd.net/">kvcd.net</A> for details on the KVCD specification. Please
+note that KVCD ("K Video Compression Dynamics") is the name of a compression
+scheme that can be applied to any MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 video, and has little to
+do with VCD ("Video Compact Disc"), which is the name of a standard video disc
+format.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc23"></A>
+<H2>Advanced options</H2>
+
+<H3>Aspect ratios</H3>
+
+
+tovid automatically determines aspect ratio of the input video by playing it in
+mplayer. If your video plays with correct aspect in mplayer, you should not
+need to override the default tovid behavior.
+
+
+If mplayer does not play your video with correct aspect, you may provide an
+explicit aspect ratio in one of several ways:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-full</DT><DD>
+ Same as -aspect 4:3
+<DT>-wide</DT><DD>
+ Same as -aspect 16:9
+<DT>-panavision</DT><DD>
+ Same as -aspect 235:100
+<DT>-aspect WIDTH:HEIGHT</DT><DD>
+ Custom aspect, where WIDTH and HEIGHT are integers.
+</DL>
+
+
+The above are the intended INPUT aspect ratio. tovid chooses an optimal output
+aspect ratio for the selected disc format (VCD, DVD, etc.) and does the
+appropriate letterboxing or anamorphic scaling. Use -widetv to encode
+for a widescreen monitor or TV.
+
+
+<H3>Video stream options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-quality NUM (default 6)</DT><DD>
+ Desired output quality, on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 giving the best
+ quality at the expense of a larger output file. Default is 6. Output size
+ can vary by approximately a factor of 4 (that is, -quality 1 output
+ can be 1/4 the size of -quality 10 output). Your results may vary.
+ WARNING: With -quality 10, the output bitrate may be too high for
+ your hardware DVD player to handle. Stick with 9 or lower unless you
+ have phenomenally good eyesight.
+
+ At present, this option affects both output bitrate and quantization (but
+ may, in the future, affect other quality/size-related attributes). Use
+ -vbitrate if you want to explicitly provide a maximum bitrate.
+
+<DT>-vbitrate NUM</DT><DD>
+ Maximum bitrate to use for video (in kbits/sec). Must be within allowable
+ limits for the given format. Overrides default values. Ignored for VCD,
+ which must be constant bitrate.
+
+<DT>-interlaced</DT><DD>
+ Do interlaced encoding of the input video (top fields first). Use this
+ option if your video is interlaced, and you want to preserve as much
+ picture quality as possible. This option is ignored for VCD, which
+ doesn't support it.
+
+ You can tell your source video is interlaced by playing it, and pausing
+ during a scene with horizontal motion; if you see a "comb" effect at the
+ edges of objects in the scene, you have interlaced video. Use this option
+ to encode it properly.
+
+ If you would prefer to have output in progressive format, use
+ -progressive. If you have a DV camera, use -interlaced_bf since
+ DV footage is generally bottom fields first.
+
+<DT>-interlaced_bf</DT><DD>
+ Do interlaced encoding of the input video (bottom fields first).
+
+<DT>-deinterlace, -progressive</DT><DD>
+ Convert interlaced source video into progressive output video. Because
+ deinterlacing works by averaging fields together, some picture quality is
+ invariably lost. Uses an adaptive kernel deinterlacer (kerndeint), or,
+ if that's not available, the libavcodec deinterlacer (lavcdeint).
+
+<DT>-mkvsub LANG (EXPERIMENTAL)</DT><DD>
+ Attempt to encode an integrated subtitle stream (such as may be found in
+ Matroska .mkv files) in the given language code (eng, jpn, etc.) May work
+ for other formats.
+
+<DT>-autosubs</DT><DD>
+ Automatically include subtitle files with the same name as the input video.
+
+<DT>-subtitles FILE</DT><DD>
+ Get subtitles from FILE and encode them into the video. WARNING: This
+ hard-codes the subtitles into the video, and you cannot turn them off while
+ viewing the video. By default, no subtitles are loaded. If your video is
+ already compliant with the chosen output format, it will be re-encoded to
+ include the subtitles. This works with both -ffmpeg and the default,
+ mpeg2enc.
+
+<DT>-dvd-subtitles, -dvdsubs | FILE</DT><DD>
+ Get subtitles from FILE(S) and add them as a subtitle stream into the
+ video. This allows selectable subtitles on your DVD. You can use more than
+ one file for multiple languages. Be sure to use the -subtitle-lang option
+ in 'tovid disc' so the name of the language will show up on the DVD instead
+ of 'UNKNOWN' or similar
+
+<DT>-dvdsubs-only</DT><DD>
+ Use this if you have an already complient MPEG and wish to add a subtitle
+ stream without re-encoding, using -dvdsubs ,
+
+<DT>-dvdsubs-fontsize NUM [18]</DT><DD>
+ The pointsize in pixels for DVD selectable subtitles. To affect this for
+ hard-coded subtitles ( -subtitles ) you will need to pass options to
+ the player via -mplayeropts or -mpvopts.
+
+<DT>-type {live|animation|bw}</DT><DD>
+ Optimize video encoding for different kinds of video. Use 'live' (default)
+ for live-action video, use 'animation' for cartoons or anime, and 'bw' for
+ black-and-white video. This option currently only has an effect with
+ KVCD/KSVCD output formats; other formats may support this in the future.
+
+<DT>-safe PERCENT</DT><DD>
+ Fit the video within a safe area defined by PERCENT. For example,
+ -safe 90% will scale the video to 90% of the width/height of the output
+ resolution, and pad the edges with a black border. Use this if some of the
+ picture is cut off when played on your TV. The percent sign is optional.
+
+<DT>-filters {none,denoise,deblock,contrast,all} (default none)</DT><DD>
+ Apply post-processing filters to enhance the video. If your input video is
+ very high quality, use 'none'. If your input video is grainy, use 'denoise';
+ if it looks washed out or faded, use 'contrast'. You can use multiple
+ filters separated by commas. To apply all filters, use 'all'. This works
+ with both mpeg2enc and -ffmpeg.
+
+<DT>-fps RATIO</DT><DD>
+ Force input video to be interpreted as RATIO frames per second. May be
+ necessary for some ASF, MOV, or other videos. RATIO should be an
+ integer ratio such as "24000:1001" (23.976fps), "30000:1001" (29.97fps), or
+ "25:1" (25fps). This option is temporary, and may disappear in future
+ releases. (Hint: To convert a decimal like 23.976 to an integer ratio, just
+ multiply by 1000, i.e. 23976:1000)
+
+<DT>-crop WIDTH:HEIGHT:X:Y</DT><DD>
+ Crop a portion of the video WIDTH by HEIGHT in size, with the
+ top-left corner at X, Y.
+
+<DT>-widetv</DT><DD>
+ Always encode to 16:9 widescreen (only supported by -dvd, -kdvd,
+ -bdvd), for optimal viewing on a widescreen monitor or TV.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Audio stream options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-normalize</DT><DD>
+ Analyze the audio stream and then normalize the volume of the audio.
+ This is useful if the audio is too quiet or too loud, or you want to
+ make volume consistent for a bunch of videos. Similar to running
+ normalize without any parameters. The default is -12dB average level
+ with 0dB gain.
+
+<DT>-amplitude NUM[dB]</DT><DD>
+ In addition to analyzing and normalizing, apply the gain to the audio
+ such that the 'average' (RMS) sound level is NUM. Valid values
+ range 0.0 - 1.0, with 0.0 being silent and 1.0 being full scale. Use
+ NUMdB for a decibel gain below full scale (the default without
+ -amplitude is -12dB).
+
+<DT>-abitrate NUM</DT><DD>
+ Encode audio at NUM kilobits per second. Reasonable values include
+ 128, 224, and 384. The default is 224 kbits/sec, good enough for most
+ encodings. The value must be within the allowable range for the chosen disc
+ format; Ignored for VCD, which must be 224.
+
+<DT>-audiotrack NUM</DT><DD>
+ Encode the given audio track, if the input video has multiple audio tracks.
+ NUM is 1 for the first track, 2 for the second, etc. You may
+ also provide a list of tracks, separated by spaces or commas, for example
+ -audiotrack 3,1,2. Use tovid id on your source video to determine
+ which audio tracks it contains.
+
+<DT>-downmix</DT><DD>
+ Encode all audio tracks as stereo. This can save space on your DVD if
+ your player only does stereo. The default behavior of tovid is to use
+ the original number of channels in each track. For aac audio, downmixing
+ is not possible: tovid runs a quick 1 frame test to try to downmix the
+ input track with the largest number of channels, and if it fails then it
+ will revert to the default behavior of using the original channels.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Other options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-config FILE</DT><DD>
+ Read configuration from FILE, containing 'tovid' alone on the first
+ line, and free-formatted (whitespace-separated) tovid command-line options
+ on remaining lines.
+
+<DT>-force</DT><DD>
+ Force encoding of already-compliant video or audio streams.
+
+<DT>-overwrite</DT><DD>
+ Overwrite any existing output files (with the same name as the given
+ -out option).
+
+<DT>-priority {low|medium|high}</DT><DD>
+ Sets the main encoding process to the given priority. With high priority,
+ it may take other programs longer to load and respond. With lower priority,
+ other programs will be more responsive, but encoding may take 30-40%
+ longer. The default is high priority.
+
+<DT>-discsize NUM</DT><DD>
+ When encoding, tovid automatically splits the output file into several
+ pieces if it exceeds the size of the target media. This option sets the
+ desired target DVD/CD-R size to NUM mebibytes (MiB, 2^20). By default,
+ splitting occurs at 700 for CD, 4300 for DVD. Use higher values at your
+ own risk. Use 650 or lower if you plan to burn to smaller-capacity CDs.
+ Doesn't work with the -ffmpeg option.
+
+<DT>-fit NUM</DT><DD>
+ Fit the output file into NUM MiB. Rather than using default (or
+ specified) video bitrates, tovid will calculate the correct video bitrate
+ that will limit the final output size to NUM MiB. This is different
+ than -discsize, which cuts the final file into NUM MiB pieces.
+ -fit makes sure that the file never exceeds NUM MiB. This works
+ with -ffmpeg, but not with -vcd since VCDs have a standardized
+ constant bitrate.
+
+<DT>-parallel</DT><DD>
+ Perform ripping, encoding, and multiplexing processes in parallel using
+ named pipes. Maximizes CPU utilization and minimizes disk usage. Note that
+ this option simply does more tasks simultaneously, in order to make better
+ use of available CPU cycles; it's unrelated to multi-CPU processing (which
+ is done automatically anyway). Has no effect when -ffmpeg is used.
+
+<DT>-update SECS</DT><DD>
+ Print status updates at intervals of SECS seconds. This affects how
+ regularly the progress-meter is updated. The default is once every five
+ seconds.
+
+<DT>-mpv</DT><DD>
+ Use mpv instead of mplayer. This option is experimental.
+
+<DT>-mplayeropts OPTIONS</DT><DD>
+ Append OPTIONS to the mplayer command run during video encoding. Use
+ this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+ manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail, so use
+ this with caution!
+
+<DT>-mpvopts OPTIONS</DT><DD>
+ Append OPTIONS to the mpv command run during video encoding. Use
+ this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+ or mpv manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail,
+ so use this with caution!
+
+<DT>-nofifo (EXPERIMENTAL)</DT><DD>
+ Do not use a FIFO pipe for video encoding. If you are getting "Broken pipe"
+ errors with normal encoding, try this option. WARNING: This uses lots of
+ disk space (about 2 GB per minute of video).
+
+<DT>-keepfiles</DT><DD>
+ Keep the intermediate files after encoding. Usually, this means the audio
+ and video streams are kept (eg the .ac3 and .m2v files for an NTSC DVD).
+ This doesn't work with -parallel because the intermediate files are named
+ pipes, and not real files.
+
+<DT>-slice START-END</DT><DD>
+ Encode a segment from START to END (in seconds). Only works with
+ -ffmpeg.
+
+<DT>-from-gui</DT><DD>
+ Put makempg into a fully non-interactive state, suitable for calling from
+ a gui.
+
+<DT>-noask</DT><DD>
+ Don't ask questions when choices need to be made. Assume reasonable
+ answers.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc24"></A>
+<H1>Command:id</H1>
+
+
+tovid id identifies each multimedia video file in a
+list, and reports its compliance with video disc standards such as VCD,
+SVCD, and DVD.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc25"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+
+tovid id [OPTIONS] VIDEO_FILE(s)
+
+
+For example:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id foo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -tabluar videos/*.mpg</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc26"></A>
+<H2>Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-terse</DT><DD>
+ Print raw video characteristics, no formatting. Helpful when
+ calling from other scripts.
+
+<DT>-verbose</DT><DD>
+ Print extra information from mplayer, tcprobe, and ffmpeg.
+
+<DT>-accurate</DT><DD>
+ Do lengthy play-time estimation by scanning through the entire video file.
+ Use this if the default behavior is giving you inaccurate play times.
+
+<DT>-fast</DT><DD>
+ Skip lengthy play-time estimation, and go with what mplayer reports
+ as being the video duration. Unlike pre-0.32 versions of tovid, this
+ is now the default behavior, and the -fast option doesn't do anything.
+
+<DT>-tabular</DT><DD>
+ Display output in a table format for easier comparison. Most useful
+ when identifying multiple video files.
+
+<DT>-keepfiles</DT><DD>
+ Keep temporary directory for debugging.
+
+<DT>-isformat [pal-dvd|ntsc-dvd] (same syntax for vcd and svcd)</DT><DD>
+ Check VIDEO_FILE for compliance with the given disc format.
+ If VIDEO_FILE matches the given format, then tovid id reports "true"
+ and exits successfully. Otherwise, tovid id reports "false" and exits
+ with status 1 (failure). This checks and reports both vcd/svcd/dvd
+ and pal/ntsc.
+
+<DT>-mpv</DT><DD>
+ This option is mainly for testing. If you have only mpv installed instead
+ of mplayer, it is used automatically. With this option, you can have BOTH
+ installed and choose which one to use. (default: mplayer)
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc27"></A>
+<H2>Examples</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -verbose homevideo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+ Report everything mplayer, ffmpeg, and transcode can determine about
+ homevideo.avi.
+
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -isformat dvd homevideo.mpg</CODE></DT><DD>
+ Check to see if homevideo.mpg is compliant with the DVD standard.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc28"></A>
+<H1>Command:dvd</H1>
+
+
+tovid dvd takes a DVD directory as generated by tovid with 'tovid disc' or
+one of the GUI frontends like 'tovid gui' or 'tovid titlesets' and burns
+it to appropriate media. This will also work if the DVD directory is
+generated by the dvdauthor backend that tovid also uses.
+
+
+Running this program may slow down your other applications, due to intense
+disk activity.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc29"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+
+tovid dvd [OPTIONS] DVD_DIR
+
+
+For example:
+
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid dvd /path/to/DVD/directory</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc30"></A>
+<H2>Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>-burn</DT><DD>
+ Burn a DVD file-system in DVD_DIR (must contain a VIDEO_TS folder).
+ This option is currently not necessary as the makedvd script ONLY burns
+ now that legacy scripts like makexml have been removed. Left for
+ compatibility only.
+
+<DT>-eject</DT><DD>
+ Eject the DVD tray after burning is complete. By default, the DVD is not
+ ejected.
+
+<DT>-device DEVICE (default /dev/dvdrw)</DT><DD>
+ Burn the disc image to DEVICE, the Linux device file-system
+ name of your DVD-recorder. Common examples might be /dev/dvdrw,
+ /dev/scd1, and /dev/hdc. You can also use a bus/id/lun triple
+ such as ATAPI:0,1,0
+
+<DT>-speed NUM (default 1)</DT><DD>
+ Burn disc at speed NUM.
+
+<DT>-label DISC_LABEL</DT><DD>
+ Uses DISC_LABEL as the volume ID. This appears as the mount
+ name of the disc on some computer platforms. Must be &lt;=32
+ alphanumeric digits without spaces.
+
+<DT>-quiet</DT><DD>
+ Limit output to essential messages.
+
+<DT>-noask</DT><DD>
+ Don't ask interactive questions and assume answers that will continue
+ execution.
+</DL>
+
+
+ After burning, the DVD can be previewed by calling:
+ xine dvd:/path/to/output/directory
+ or:
+ vlc /path/to/output/directory
+
+
+<A NAME="toc31"></A>
+<H1>Command:chapters</H1>
+
+
+tovid chapters will start a GUI using mplayer to set chapter points in a
+video. If the video plays through and you want to add more chapters you can
+press the play button again, but remember that new chapter points will be
+appended (in correct sequential order). It will display the resulting chapter
+points, and also output to a terminal (useful for scripts). As well it will
+give the option of saving the chapters string to a text file.
+
+
+Note that the 'tovid gui' now features a similar widget when you press the
+chapters button on the opening page.
+
+
+<A NAME="toc32"></A>
+<H2>Examples</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid chapters foo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+
+<DT><CODE>chapters=$(tovid chapters /home/grepper/videos/foo.avi)</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc33"></A>
+<H1>CONTACT</H1>
+
+
+For further assistance, contact information, forum and IRC links,
+please refer to the <A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com/">tovid homepage</A>.
+
+
+
+
+</BODY></HTML>

 
@@ -0,0 +1,1918 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN">
+<HTML>
+<HEAD>
+<META NAME="generator" CONTENT="http://txt2tags.org">
+<TITLE>tovid manual</TITLE>
+</HEAD><BODY BGCOLOR="white" TEXT="black">
+<CENTER>
+<H1>tovid manual</H1>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P></P>
+<HR NOSHADE SIZE=1>
+<P></P>
+
+  <UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc1">Name</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc2">Description</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc3">Usage</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc4">Configuration</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc5">Command:gui</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc6">Usage</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc7">Command:titlesets</A>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc8">Command:disc</A>
+    <UL>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc9">Usage</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc10">General Options</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc11">Menu style</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc12">Thumbnail style</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc13">Slideshows</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc14">Burning the disc</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc15">Advanced usage</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc16">Menu Style</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc17">Thumbnail Style</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc18">Dvdauthor options</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc19">Usage notes</A>
+    </UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc20">Command:mpg</A>
+    <UL>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc21">Usage</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc22">Basic options</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc23">Advanced options</A>
+    </UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc24">Command:id</A>
+    <UL>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc25">Usage</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc26">Options</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc27">Examples</A>
+    </UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc28">Command:dvd</A>
+    <UL>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc29">Usage</A>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc30">Options</A>
+    </UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc31">Command:chapters</A>
+    <UL>
+    <LI><A HREF="#toc32">Examples</A>
+    </UL>
+  <LI><A HREF="#toc33">CONTACT</A>
+  </UL>
+
+<P></P>
+<HR NOSHADE SIZE=1>
+<P></P>
+
+<A NAME="toc1"></A>
+<H1>Name</H1>
+
+<P>
+tovid: Make DVDs from video files
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc2"></A>
+<H1>Description</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid</B> is a command-line tool for creating DVDs. It can encode your video
+files to DVD-compliant MPEG format, generate simple or complex DVD menus,
+author and burn a ready-to-watch DVD, with just a few shell commands. A
+graphical interface is also provided to make the process even easier.
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>NOTE</B>: As of tovid 0.35, the legacy scripts <B>makemenu</B> and <B>makexml</B>
+have been removed and no longer appear in this manpage.
+All of their functions and more can be done with the 'tovid disc' command,
+(todisc script). See <B>Command:disc</B> and the <A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com">wiki</A>
+for more info.
+</P>
+<P>
+Also note that as of tovid 0.32, this is the only manual page provided by tovid.
+There is now a single executable frontend to all functionality in the suite, so
+if you were expecting to find manpages for <B>todisc</B>, <B>idvid</B>, <B>makempg</B>
+and their kin, they can all be found in the <B>tovid</B> manpage you are reading now.
+And yes, this makes for a pretty large manual page. If you are viewing this
+manpage from the command-line <B>man</B> utility, which normally pages through the
+<B>less</B> utility, you can skip to a section by searching with the <B>/</B> key,
+followed by a <B>^</B> to match the given section name. For example, to skip to
+the <B>mpg</B> command, type <B>/^Command:mpg</B>. See <B>man less</B> for more on how
+to navigate.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc3"></A>
+<H1>Usage</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid</B> <I>COMMAND</I> [<I>OPTIONS</I>]
+</P>
+<P>
+Where <I>COMMAND</I> is one of the following:
+</P>
+<P>
+    Main Commands
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>disc</B></DT><DD>
+    Encode, make menus, author, burn. (was <B>todisc</B>. See <B>Command:disc</B>)
+<DT><B>gui</B></DT><DD>
+    Start the tovid GUI (was <B>todiscgui</B>. See <B>Command:gui</B>)
+<DT><B>titlesets</B></DT><DD>
+    A GUI wizard for multiple titlesets. (new: See <B>Command:titlesets</B>)
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+    Helper Commands
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>mpg</B></DT><DD>
+    Encode videos to MPEG format (was <B>tovid</B>. See <B>Command:mpg</B>)
+<DT><B>dvd</B></DT><DD>
+    Author and/or burn a DVD (was <B>makedvd</B>. See <B>Command:dvd</B>)
+<DT><B>id</B></DT><DD>
+    Identify one or more video files (was <B>idvid</B>. See <B>Command:id</B>)
+<DT><B>chapters</B></DT><DD>
+    A GUI using mplayer for setting chapter points.  It will return a string of
+    chapter points to the terminal, in a format recognized by 'tovid disc'
+    (todisc) or by 'tovid gui', for the  <B>-chapters</B> option.
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+The <I>OPTIONS</I> differ for each command; run <B>tovid &lt;command&gt;</B> with no
+further arguments to get help on a command, and what options it expects.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc4"></A>
+<H1>Configuration</H1>
+
+<P>
+Two configuration files are created the first time you run tovid:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>~/.tovid/preferences</B></DT><DD>
+    Defines working directory for all scripts.
+    You can define the output directory for makempg here.
+    The 'ffmpeg' executable can be set here: ffmpeg or avconv (TOVID_FFMPEG)
+<DT><B>~/.tovid/tovid.ini</B></DT><DD>
+    Includes command-line options that should be passed to the various
+    <B>tovid</B> sub-commands.  Note: each sub-command has its own section,
+    starting with the line [sub-command], for example:
+
+<PRE>
+      [disc]
+      ; -no-warn
+      -static
+      -no-ask
+</PRE>
+
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+Edit these files if you wish to change your configuration.
+</P>
+<P>
+The following environment variables are also honoured:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+      TOVID_HOME (directory containing preferences: ~/.tovid)
+      TOVID_WORKING_DIR (working directory for all scripts).
+      TOVID_OUTPUT_DIR (output directory for the makempg script).
+      TOVID_FFMPEG_CMD (the 'ffmpeg' executable to use: ffmpeg or avconv)
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+These will override 'TOVID_HOME', 'WORKING_DIR', 'OUTPUT_DIR',
+and 'TOVID_FFMPEG' if set in ~/.tovid/preferences.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc5"></A>
+<H1>Command:gui</H1>
+
+<A NAME="toc6"></A>
+<H1>Usage</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid gui</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>]
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>tovid gui</B> starts the graphical user interface (GUI) for tovid. This is
+the easiest way to start creating DVDs with tovid. The optional arguments
+<I>OPTIONS</I> are any option used by todisc ('tovid disc') which will save
+entering it manually, OR the full path to a saved script from the GUI.
+You can also combine these, but the script must be the FIRST option
+directly after <B>tovid gui</B> .  (This option to save the contents of your
+project allows you to use it as a bash script later, or to reload the
+project to continue working with it at another time.)
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>tovid gui</B> will also take the option <B>--position</B>, which denotes the
+screen position that the GUI will start at, in the form '+X+Y', similar to
+this part of the Xorg -geometry string.
+</P>
+<P>
+All help is integrated in the form of tooltips.  You can also see
+**Command:disc ** for more detail about the options.  Note: if you wish to use
+a GUI to make multiple titlesets on the same DVD use <B>*tovid titlesets*</B>,
+which is a wizard that uses the the 'tovid gui. See <B>*Command:titlesets*</B>.
+</P>
+<P>
+Please note that although the interface may seem complex with so many options,
+you can create a fully functional DVD with only a few options on the opening
+tab of the GUI (select video files and an output name).
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc7"></A>
+<H1>Command:titlesets</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid titlesets</B> will assist in making a DVD with multiple titlesets.  It can
+be started without any options, or you can feed it the path to a saved titleset
+script as an option.  The option to save a script is also useful as the resulting
+script can be run later from a terminal.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc8"></A>
+<H1>Command:disc</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid disc</B> creates a DVD file-system with optional menus, from a list of
+multimedia video files and their titles.  As todisc can function as a master
+script, calling other scripts as it needs them, it is the easiest command line
+program for creating a DVD from start to finish, including automatically
+converting non-compliant videos and prompting to burn at completion.  It can do
+animated menus, static thumbnail menus, text-only menus, or author with no menu.
+In addition, it can do slideshows, using images as input, and even combine
+slideshows with videos.  It supports sub-menus for chapter breaks,
+configurable menu style, animated backgrounds and transparency effects.
+From simple (no menu) to complex (switched menus and titlesets), you should
+be able to do what you want with 'tovid disc'.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc9"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+<PRE>
+   tovid disc [OPTIONS] \
+      -files &lt;file list&gt; -titles &lt;title list&gt;
+      -out mydvd
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+For example:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -files File1.mpg File2.mpg File3.mpg \
+        -titles "Episode 1" "Episode 2" "Episode 3" \
+        -out Season_one
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+The number of <B>-files</B> and <B>-titles</B> must be equal, though if you do not
+include any titles <B>tovid disc</B> will use the basename of the included files
+as titles.  If you are doing a slideshow or multiple slideshows, use
+<B>-slides</B> rather than <B>-files</B> for passing in the images.  You may use
+-files and -slides more than once to create an ordering in a mixed
+slideshows/videos menu.  See Slideshows part of Usage section, below.
+</P>
+<P>
+If the input files are not mpeg, you will have the option to auto-encode them.
+</P>
+<P>
+General Options
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>At present there are 2 display arrangements or "templates":</B>
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT>A. (Default)</DT><DD>
+    Thumbs will be centred, and as large as space restraints allow.
+<P></P>
+<DT>B. <B>-showcase</B> IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+    Produces an arrangement with small buttons on
+    the side and the showcase image/video in the centre.  If no IMAGE or VIDEO
+    argument is supplied, the central thumb will be omitted.
+<P></P>
+    Note: <B>-textmenu</B>, <B>-quick-menu</B> and <B>-switched-menus</B> are all types
+    of showcase style menus.  See descriptions under <B>Menu style</B> section.
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+The <B>-titles</B> arguments should be double or single quoted, or have the spaces
+backslash-escaped. Special characters (like ", !, *, &amp;, ?) may need to be
+backslash-escaped.  To include a quoted string within a title, backslash-escape
+the quotes.  These titles are used for labelling thumbnails on the main menu,
+and for the submenu title for that video.  ( see also <B>-submenu-titles</B> )
+</P>
+<P>
+The <B>-showcase</B> styles can use longer titles than the default arrangement.
+With a showcase style, use: <B>-showcase-titles-align west</B> to give more space
+for the title, or use <B>-showcase-titles-align east</B> to allow titles of more
+than one line.
+</P>
+<P>
+The default style can only show about 16 characters (depending on the number
+of thumbs, and what <B>-titles-font</B> and <B>-titles-fontsize</B> is being used).
+If your titles are too long to fit in the label area, you may try using
+sub-menus, which can display longer titles, for example:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -submenus \
+        -files file1.mpg file2.mpg ... \
+        -titles "Short 1" "Short 2" \
+        -submenus \
+        -submenu-titles "Long Title One" "Long Title Two" \
+        -out foo
+  
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+The <B>-align</B> argument will position both titles and thumbs either south,
+north east, west, southwest, northwest, southeast, northeast, subject to
+certain constraints of each arrangement. For example a showcase style with
+a showcase thumb can only do north|south|center.
+</P>
+<P>
+More Examples:
+</P>
+<P>
+A text-only menu:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -textmenu ...
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+No menu:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid -nomenu -files file1.mpg file2.mp4 "file 3.avi" -out mydvd
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+<B>Titlesets</B>
+</P>
+<P>
+A word should be mentioned here about titlesets, which is really just a
+hierarchy of menus.  You need to use titlesets, for example, if you have videos
+of different resolutions, or otherwise want to arrange videos on separate menus.
+If you want to have titlesets you need to put all the options for each titleset
+menu you would like to have between <B>-titleset</B> and <B>-end-titleset</B> options.
+</P>
+<P>
+Additionally, for the main menu (the opening menu that will let you jump to
+each titleset), you need to put options between <B>-vmgm</B> and <B>-end-vmgm</B>.
+You do not use <B>-files</B> for the opening menu options (<B>-vmgm</B>), but you
+will need as many TITLES after <B>-titles</B> as you have menus.
+</P>
+<P>
+Any options outside the <B>-titleset</B> <B>-end-titleset</B> and <B>-vmgm</B>
+<B>-end-vmgm</B> areas will be global options applying to every titleset.
+If a global option is duplicated inside a <B>-titleset</B> or <B>-vmgm</B> area, the
+global option will be overridden.
+</P>
+<P>
+Note: you do not need titlesets for a single menu with chapter break menus, for
+that just use <B>-submenus</B> or <B>-ani-submenus</B>
+</P>
+<P>
+Example of using <B>tovid disc</B> with titlesets:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -static -out MY_DVD \
+     \
+     -titleset \
+     -files 1.mpg 2.mpg 3.mpg \
+     -titles "Title One" "Title Two" "Title Three" \
+     -end-titleset \
+     \
+     -titleset \
+     -files 4.mpg 5.mpg \
+     -titles "Title Four" "Title Five" \
+     -background foo.jpg \
+     -showcase bar.png \
+     -end-titleset \
+     \
+     -vmgm \
+     -titles "Season One" "Season Two" \
+     -background bg.jpg \
+     -bgaudio foo.mp3 \
+     -titles-fontsize 20 \
+     -end-vmgm
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+See also <B>-titleset</B> and <B>-vmgm</B>
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>Slideshows</B>
+</P>
+<P>
+You can also use <B>tovid disc</B> to make slideshows.  This can either be a single
+slideshow, or multiple slideshows on the same menu.
+Remember to use <B>-slides</B> rather than <B>-files</B> for passing in the
+images.  Images can be any filetype that imagemagick supports: for example
+JPEG, PNG, GIF, TGA BMP etc.  For a single slideshow do not use <B>-titles</B>:
+use -menu-title to set the slideshow title.
+</P>
+<P>
+For a single slideshow the default is an animated menu that transitions from
+slide to slide.  The default transition type is 'crossfade', which fades each
+slide into the next and loops back to the first slide at the end.  If instead
+you use <B>-static</B>, then a static 'polaroid stack' menu of all the slides is
+created, with a single spumux'ed button for navigating with the enter key.  You
+may have to experiment to find out which DVD remote button advances the slides.
+Try the 'next chapter'(skip ?) button and the play or enter buttons.
+If you want to limit the number of slides in the menu to a subset of all files
+entered with <B>-slides</B>, then use <B>-menu-slide-total</B> INT.  Be sure to use
+a long enough audio file for <B>-bgaudio</B> or set <B>-menu-length</B> so the menu
+is long enough to support the slides plus transitions.
+</P>
+<P>
+You can also put multiple slideshows on one menu.  To do this, use
+<B>-slides IMAGES</B> for each slideshow desired.  You can even mix videos
+with slideshows by using <B>-files</B> <B>-slides</B> <B>-titles</B> multiple times.
+</P>
+<P>
+Example of a single slideshow with an animated menu with transitions:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" -slides images/*.jpg \
+      -menu-slide-total 20 -slide-transition crossfade -bgaudio slideshow.wav \
+      -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+Example of multiple slideshows on one menu:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+     -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+     -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+     -slides photos/november/*.jpg \
+     -tile3x1 -rotate -5 5 -5 -align center \
+     -bgaudio background.wav \
+     -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+Example of mixed videos and slideshows:
+</P>
+
+<PRE>
+   $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+     -files fall_fair.mov \
+     -slides  photos/september/*.jpg \
+     -files harvest.mpg \
+     -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+     -titles "Fall Fair" "September" "Harvest" "October" \
+     -background autumn.png \
+     -bgaudio bg.mp3 \
+     -out myslideshow
+</PRE>
+
+<P>
+See the other slideshow options in the Slideshows options section.
+</P>
+<P>
+<B>Encoding Options</B>
+</P>
+<P>
+These are options for reencoding your non-compliant videos.  They are passed
+directly to the <B>tovid mpg</B> command which is invoked by <B>tovid disc</B> when
+non-compliant files are found.  For details, see the <B>Command:mpg</B> section.
+Here is a list of possible options you can pass:
+    <B>-config</B>, <B>-ntscfilm</B>, <B>-dvd-vcd</B>, <B>-half-dvd</B>, <B>-kvcd</B>,
+    <B>-kvcdx3</B>, <B>-kvcdx3a</B>, <B>-kdvd</B>, <B>-bdvd</B>, <B>-704</B>, <B>-normalize</B>,
+    <B>-amplitude</B>, <B>-overwrite</B>, <B>-panavision</B>, <B>-force</B>, <B>-fps</B>,
+    <B>-vbitrate</B>, <B>-quality</B>, <B>-safe</B>, <B>-crop</B>, <B>-filters</B>,
+    <B>-abitrate</B>, <B>-priority</B>, <B>-deinterlace</B>, <B>-progressive</B>,
+    <B>-interlaced</B>, <B>-interlaced_bf</B>, <B>-type</B>, <B>-fit</B>, <B>-discsize</B>,
+    <B>-parallel</B>, <B>-mkvsub</B>, <B>-autosubs</B>, <B>-subtitles</B>, <B>-update</B>,
+    <B>-mplayeropts</B>, <B>-audiotrack</B>, <B>-downmix</B>, <B>-ffmpeg</B>, <B>-nofifo</B>,
+    <B>-from-gui</B>, <B>-slice</B>, <B>-quiet</B>,
+    <B>-fake</B>, <B>-keepfiles</B>
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc10"></A>
+<H2>General Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-keep-files</B>, <B>-keepfiles</B></DT><DD>
+    Keep all intermediate/temporary files (helps with debugging)
+<DT><B>-no-ask</B> | <B>-noask</B></DT><DD>
+    Skip all interactive questions.  No preview, automatic re-encoding with
+    tovid if needed, no interactive option to use background video for bgaudio.
+<DT><B>-no-warn</B>, <B>-nowarn</B></DT><DD>
+    Don't pause after outputting warning or info messages
+<DT><B>-jobs</B></DT><DD>
+    By default, <B>tovid disc</B> starts a parallel job for each processor
+    detected.  With this option you can manually set the number of jobs.  For
+    example if you have a computer with 2 CPUs you can set "-jobs 1" to keep
+    one processor free for other things.  At present this applies to the time
+    consuming imagemagick loops: you will notice a substantial speedup now if
+    you have a multi-cpu system.
+<DT><B>-grid</B></DT><DD>
+    Show a second preview image with a grid and numbers that will help in finding
+    coordinates for options that might use them, like <B>-text-start</B>
+<DT><B>-no-confirm-backup</B></DT><DD>
+    This option is for when your DVD contains images for a slideshow.
+    Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature.  Todisc is
+    unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+    and backup your images, as you would with any beta software.  Todisc
+    will prompt you to backup your files normally.  If you have already backed
+    up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+<P></P>
+==Options==
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-ntsc</B></DT><DD>
+    720x480 output, compatible with NTSC standard (default)
+<DT><B>-pal</B></DT><DD>
+    720x576 output, compatible with PAL standard
+<DT><B>-submenus</B></DT><DD>
+    Create a sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: no sub-menus)
+<DT><B>-ani-submenus</B></DT><DD>
+    Create an animated sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: not
+    animated)
+<DT><B>-no-menu | -nomenu</B></DT><DD>
+    With this option todisc will just create a DVD file system, ready for
+    burning, with NO MENU, just the supplied video files.  These do not need
+    to be compliant, as non-compliant files will be encoded as usual.  The
+    <B>-out</B> option is not required.  Each  video will be a chapter unless
+    <B>-chapters</B> OPTION is passed.  The  <B>-chapters</B> option is a number
+    indicating the chapter interval in minutes, or a HH:MM:SS string
+    indicating chapter points.  See <B>-chapters</B>
+<DT><B>-encode-only</B></DT><DD>
+    This option was originally meant for the GUI, to allow it to be used for
+    just encoding rather than making a DVD structure.  But it works well from
+    the command line as well as it has the added advantage that you can input
+    a list of files.  Remember any makempg ('tovid mpg') options you use will
+    be passed on to the makempg script when encoding.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc11"></A>
+<H2>Menu style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-showcase</B> IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+    If used without an argument, use showcase style without a central thumb.
+    This is a different arrangement of images for the menu: small thumbnails
+    go at left (and right) side of screen, with a larger image in the centre.
+    Maximum of 10 videos.  If the provided argument is a video file, the
+    central thumb will be animated (regardless of whether <B>-static</B> is part
+    of the command line). Only 4:3 or 16:9 videos and images are accepted for
+    for the showcase file: if not one of these todisc will assume it is the
+    aspect ratio as the videos in the titleset.
+<DT><B>-textmenu</B>, <B>-text-menu</B> NUM</DT><DD>
+    If used without an argument, create a textmenu out of the supplied titles
+    The optional argument specifies how many titles are in the 1st column,
+    i.e. giving 4 titles and using "-textmenu 2" would make 2 columns of 2
+    titles. The default is to put all titles up to 13 in the first column
+    before starting a second column.  Maximum: 2 columns and 26 titles.
+    Note that column 2 titles are justified to the left unless you add
+    <B>-edge-justify</B> to the command line. The menu will be static if no video
+    files are supplied with either <B>-background</B> or <B>-showcase</B> options.
+<DT><B>-quick-menu</B></DT><DD>
+    If you are using ffmpeg 0.8 or newer you can use this option.  This will
+    make a very quick  menu by using ffmpeg instead of imagemagick.
+    There are two choices: you can either use '-showcase IMAGE|VIDEO' or
+    '-background VIDEO'.  There are no fancy effects like <B>-wave</B>
+    or <B>-rotate</B> available for it, but it is extremely fast.  It will be a
+    text-menu style of menu, with no video thumbs, and a central showcase
+    IMAGE(static) | VIDEO(animated).
+    (i) see <B>-bg-color</B> if you are not using a <B>-background</B> and want to
+    change the default.  (default is dark blue for -quick-menu arrangements). )
+    (ii) Note: todisc will still work with 'vhooks' if you have an old ffmpeg
+    with vhooks compiled in.
+<P></P>
+    Specifying the IMAGE|VIDEO argument to <B>-showcase</B> is mandatory for this
+    style of menu, unless used in conjunction with <B>-switched-menus</B>
+    in which case the videos passed with <B>-files</B> automatically become the
+    showcase videos.  If <B>-quick-menu</B> is used in combination with
+    <B>-switched-menus</B> it really speeds up an otherwise time consuming process.
+<P></P>
+    Example:
+<PRE>
+      -quick-menu -showcase /home/grepper/showcase.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+    See <B>-switched-menus</B> for example of making switched menus with
+    <B>-quick-menu</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-bg-color</B>, <B>-bg-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    The color to use for the menu background. (default: ntsc-safe black)
+    Note: use a color a great deal darker than you want, as it appears quite
+    a bit lighter in the video version.  You can use hexadecimal ('#ffac5f')
+    notation or named colors ('Lime').  convert -list color will show them.
+    See <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php">colors</A> for more details.
+<DT><B>-submenu-bg-color</B>, <B>-submenu-bg-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    The color to use as background for the  submenu(s).
+    (default: ntsc-safe black)  See <B>-bg-color</B>
+<DT><B>-static</B></DT><DD>
+    Main menu will consist of static thumbnail links. (default: animated)
+    If you use a video for -showcase or -background then it will still be
+    a 'moving' menu, in spite of the static buttons.  This option also does
+    double duty for the <B>-switched-menus</B> option, and will create static
+    "switched" images.
+    See also <B>-switched-menus</B>
+<DT><B>-background</B> IMAGE|VIDEO</DT><DD>
+    Menu background.  This can be a image file or an video file.  If it is a
+    video file the background will be animated.  Pick a file of correct aspect
+    ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to 4:3 aspect ratio.
+    It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+<DT><B>-submenu-background</B> IMAGE</DT><DD>
+    Submenu background.  This can be only be an image file.  Pick a file of
+    correct aspect ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to
+    4:3 aspect ratio.  It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+<DT><B>-menu-title</B></DT><DD>
+    Title for the root menu - may be longer than thumbnail labels
+    Also if you use \n in the title, you can use multi line titles, but you
+    would need to adjust <B>-title-fontsize</B> to something smaller than default
+    for example:
+<P></P>
+<PRE>
+      $ tovid disc ... -menu-title "A\nMultilined\nTitle" -title-fontsize 24
+</PRE>
+
+<DT><B>-title-font</B>, <B>-menu-font</B> FONT</DT><DD>
+    Font to use for titles, either by ImageMagick font name (ex., "Arial") or
+    explicit pathname (ex., "/full/path/to/arial.ttf"). To see a complete
+    list of acceptable ImageMagick font names, run <B>convert -list type</B>, and
+    refer to the leftmost column
+<DT><B>-title-fontsize</B>, <B>-menu-fontsize</B></DT><DD>
+    Font size for main menu - best to -preview if you use this
+<DT><B>-submenu-font</B></DT><DD>
+    Font to use for the sub-menu main titles.  See <B>-title-font</B>
+<DT><B>-submenu-fontsize</B></DT><DD>
+    Font size for the sub-menu main titles
+<DT><B>-menu-fade</B> ['BACKGROUND DURATION']</DT><DD>
+    Fade the menu in and out The background will fade in first, then title (and
+    mist if called for), then the menu thumbs.  The fadeout is in reverse
+    order.  'BACKGROUND DURATION' is an integer denoting the amount of time
+    the background will play before the menu begins to fade in.  This can allow
+    you to do a 'transition' to the menu: if you supply a -background VIDEO it
+    will play for the indicated time before the menu fades in.  Leave the
+    optional argument empty (just <B>-menu-fade</B>) to get the default behavior
+    of showing the background for 1 second before fading the menu in.  To
+    disable the fadeout portion, use '<B>-loop</B> inf'.  See also:
+    <B>-transition-to-menu</B> and <B>-loop</B>
+<DT><B>-transition-to-menu</B></DT><DD>
+    This option goes with the <B>-menu-fade</B> option above, which must be
+    enabled for it to have effect.  It is a convenience option for animated
+    backgrounds: the background will become static at the exact point the
+    thumbs finish fading in. This menu does not loop unless you pass
+    <B>-loop</B> VALUE.  See also: <B>-loop</B>
+<DT><B>-bgaudio</B>, <B>-bg-audio*</B> FILE</DT><DD>
+    An file containing audio for the main menu background.  For static menus
+    the default is to use 20 seconds of audio.  You can change this using the
+    <B>-menu-length</B> option.
+<DT><B>-submenu-audio</B> FILE(S)</DT><DD>
+    List of files for sub-menu audio backgrounds. If one file is given, then
+    it will be used for all sub-menus.  Otherwise the number given must equal
+    the number of submenus, though the keyword "none" in this list may be used for
+    silence.  See also <B>-submenu-length</B>
+<DT><B>-titleset</B> . . . <B>-end-titleset</B></DT><DD>
+    If you have more than one titleset, put options for each titleset between
+    <B>-titleset</B> and <B>-end-titleset</B>.  A separate menu will be created that
+    can be accessed from the main menu (VMGM).  You can create this main menu
+    using the <B>-vmgm</B> <B>-end-vmgm</B> options.  See <B>-vmgm</B> below and
+    TITLESET paragraph opening <B>Usage</B> section.
+<DT><B>-vmgm</B> . . . <B>-end-vmgm</B></DT><DD>
+    The VMGM menu is the root menu when you use titlesets.
+    Put your VMGM menu options between <B>-vmgm</B> and <B>-end-vmgm</B>.
+    You only need <B>-titles</B> "Titleset One title"  "Titleset Two title"
+    . . . , and not <B>-files</B>.
+    Any other options can be used, but the  menu will be a textmenu style by
+    default.  <B>Hint</B>: use <B>-showcase</B> IMAGE/VIDEO to create a fancier
+    VMGM menu.
+<DT><B>-no-vmgm-menu</B>, <B>-no-vmgm</B></DT><DD>
+  This will skip the creation of a VMGM ( root menu ) for titlesets. The DVD
+  will start with the first titleset.  You can not use this option unless also
+  using <B>-quick-nav</B> as you would not have a way to get to other titlesets.
+<DT><B>-skip-vmgm</B></DT><DD>
+  Start DVD from the first titleset instead of the VMGM ( root ) menu.
+<DT><B>-switched-menus</B>, <B>-switched-menu</B></DT><DD>
+    This will make a "switched menu": there will be a central image where the
+    showcase image would go, and text menu titles along the menu edge where
+    textmenu titles go.  As you select a video title with the down or up arrow
+    on your DVD remote, the image in the centre will change to the image or
+    video made from that selected video. Do not use <B>-showcase</B> IMAGE/VIDEO
+    with this option.
+<P></P>
+    This can be a time consuming process for making animated menus as you need
+    to make a separate menu for each video provided with <B>-files</B>.  The
+    process can be greatly sped up by using <B>-quick-menu</B> in conjunction with
+    this, though you will lose fancy options like <B>-rotate</B> and <B>-wave</B>.
+<P></P>
+    Note that if you want to just have a static rather than an 'animated'
+    image, add <B>-static</B> to the command line.
+<P></P>
+    Example for using with <B>-quick-menu</B>:
+<PRE>
+      -switched-menus -quick-menu
+</PRE>
+
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc12"></A>
+<H2>Thumbnail style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-titles-font</B> FONT</DT><DD>
+    Display thumbnail or textmenu titles in the given font
+<DT><B>-titles-fontsize</B> POINTS</DT><DD>
+    Font size to use for thumbnail or textmenu titles
+<DT><B>-thumb-shape</B></DT><DD>
+    normal|oval|vignette|plectrum|arch|spiral|blob|star|flare
+    Apply a shaped transparency mask to thumbnail videos.
+    These "feathered" shapes look best against a plain background (or used
+    in conjunction with <B>-thumb-mist</B> [COLOR]).  For this rectangular
+    semi-transparent misted background for each thumb:  see <B>-thumb-mist</B>.
+    Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+    $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+    command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+    (i.e ~/.tovid/masks/tux.png becomes -thumb-shape tux)
+    No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+<DT><B>-thumb-frame-size</B> INT</DT><DD>
+    The size (thickness) of the thumb frames in pixels.  This will also set the
+    thickness of the raised "frame" of thumbs when you use <B>-3d-thumbs</B>.
+    See also <B>-showcase-frame-size</B> and <B>-thumb-frame-color</B>
+<DT><B>-thumb-frame-color</B>, <B>-thumb-frame-colour</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    The color of frames for video thumbnails.  Use hexadecimal or named colors
+    notation.  Remember to quote if using hexadecimal! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+<DT><B>-3d-thumbs</B>, <B>-3dthumbs</B></DT><DD>
+    This will give an illusion of 3D to the thumbnails: dynamic lighting on
+    rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs.  Try it !
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc13"></A>
+<H2>Slideshows</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-slides</B> IMAGES</DT><DD>
+    Use <B>-slides</B> IMAGES to pass in images for a slideshow.  The default is
+    to make an animated menu of the slides, moving from one slide to the
+    next. If you use <B>-static</B>, a 'polaroid stack' montage is created.  This
+    composites the slides onto the background in 'random' locations with random
+    rotations.  <B>-slides</B>  IMAGES can be used multiple times if you wish to
+    make a menu with multiple slideshows.  You can also make a menu
+    of mixed videos and slideshows by using <B>-slides</B> IMAGES, and <B>-files</B>
+    VIDEOS multiple times.  For such a menu, the number of <B>-titles</B>
+    needs to match the number of <B>-files</B> passed in plus the number of
+    slideshows.  (Each time you use <B>-slides</B> counts as one title.)  To use
+    a transition between the slides, use <B>-slide-transition</B>
+    crossfade|fade.  See <B>-slide-transition</B> <B>-menu-slide-total</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-menu-slide-total</B> INT</DT><DD>
+    Use INT number of the slides that were passed in with <B>-slides</B>
+    to make the animated or static slide menu.  The length of the menu is
+    determined by 1) <B>-menu-length</B> NUM if given,  and by 2) the length
+    of the audio from <B>-bgaudio</B>.  For submenu slideshows, it is determined
+    by 1) <B>-submenu-length</B> NUM if given,  and by 2) the length of the
+    audio from <B>-submenu-audio</B> FILE(S).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-submenu-slide-total</B> INT</DT><DD>
+    This option is the same as <B>-menu-slide-total</B> except that it is
+    for submenu slideshows.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slide-transition</B> crossfade|fade [crossfade]</DT><DD>
+    The type of fade transition between slides in a animated slide menu.  Be
+    sure the menu length is long enough to support the 1 second transitions
+    between the slides.  The length is determined by 1) the length of the
+    -bgaudio AUDIO  2) the length given with -menu-length NUM.  For submenu
+    slideshows, it is determined by 1) <B>-submenu-length</B> NUM if given,  and
+    by 2) the length of the audio from <B>-submenu-audio</B> FILE(S).
+<P></P>
+    See <B>-menu-slide-total</B> , <B>-bgaudio</B> , <B>-menu-length</B> ,
+    <B>-submenu-length</B>, and <B>-submenu-audio</B>.
+<P></P>
+    The 'crossfade' transition fades from one slide to another.  The 'fade'
+    transition fades in and out from and to black.  If you don't use this
+    option, the default is to use a 'crossfade' transition.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slideshow-menu-thumbs</B> FILES</DT><DD>
+    Use the FILES instead of the 1st image in each slideshow as the
+    thumb that shows on the menu.  This option is for multiple slideshows
+    or mixed slideshow/video menus only.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slides-to-bin</B> FILES</DT><DD>
+    FILES will be resized to 640x480 using a 'box' filter - this
+    is called 'binning'.  It will reduce the 'signal to noise' ratio for the
+    image in the animated slide menu.  Use this if you get some unwanted
+    effects for certain images, such as pixels shifting in what should be a
+    static image.  See also <B>-slides-to-blur</B> and <B>-slide-border</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slides-to-blur</B> FILES</DT><DD>
+    FILES will be blurred a small amount - which will help on
+    slides that still have noise even after 'binning' with -slides-to-bin.
+    The default blur is 0x0.2 - you can increase this with
+    -slide-blur ARG.  See also <B>-slides-to-bin</B> and <B>-slide-border</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slide-blur</B> VALUE or LIST of VALUES [0x0.2]</DT><DD>
+    The argument to use for blurring files.  It will be passed to
+    imagemagick: convert -blur ARG.  The format of the arg is {radius}x{sigma}
+    and the default is 0x0.2. Using values between 0x0.1 and 0x0.9 is probably
+    the best range.  Use a single value for all, or a list to have a different
+    blur for each file passed with <B>-slides-to-blur</B>.  You must pass in
+    <B>-files-to-blur</B> FILES to use this option.  Blurring can help 'noise'
+    problems in the video.  See also <B>-slides-to-bin</B> and <B>-slide-border</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slide-border</B> WIDTH [100]</DT><DD>
+    Pad the slides with a border for the animated slide menu.  The default
+    without using an argument is 100.  Using this option can also solve some
+    noise/ringing effects if used alone or in conjunction with 'binning'
+    (<B>-slides-to-bin</B>) or blurring (<B>-slides-to-blur</B>).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slide-frame</B> WIDTH [12]</DT><DD>
+    Frame the slides for the animated slideshow menu.  The default width
+    without using an  argument is 12.  See also <B>-slide-frame-color</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slide-frame-color</B>, <B>-slide-frame-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    The color of the slide frame if passing <B>-slide-frame</B>.  The default if
+    you don't use this option is a color-safe white: rgb(235,235,235).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-showcase-slideshow</B></DT><DD>
+    If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+    the animated slideshow as a showcase video.  It will be composed of slides
+    from each slideshow in the menu.  The thumb for each slideshow button will
+    be static.  If you used with a mixed menu of videos and slideshows, then
+    the video thumbs WILL be animated, so you may wish to use -static or
+    -textmenu with the option in that case.  If you want to use the
+    **-switched-menus option with a mixed menu leave this option out.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-background-slideshow</B>, <B>-bg-slideshow</B></DT><DD>
+    If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+    the animated slideshow as a background video.  See <B>-showcase-slideshow</B>
+    for additional details.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-no-confirm-backup</B></DT><DD>
+    Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature.  Todisc is
+    unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+    and backup your images, as you would with any beta software.  Todisc
+    will prompt you to backup your files normally.  If you have already backed
+    up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+    See <B>General Options</B>
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-use-dvd-slideshow</B> <A HREF="FILE">CONFIG</A></DT><DD>
+    If you pass this option without an argument, tovid will use the
+    dvd-slideshow program to create the animated slide menu, assuming you have
+    this program installed.  The optional argument is the dvd-slideshow
+    configuration file  - if you don't use this argument tovid will create it
+    for you.  If you want to use the 'Ken Burns effect' - then the
+    configuration file argument is required.  Note: the configuration file will
+    override many of the above options for slideshows.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc14"></A>
+<H2>Burning the disc</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-burn</B></DT><DD>
+    Prompt to burn the DVD directory on completion.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-device</B></DT><DD>
+    Device to use for the burning program [ /dev/dvdrw ]
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-speed</B></DT><DD>
+    The speed to use for burning the disc.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc15"></A>
+<H2>Advanced usage</H2>
+
+<H3>Options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-menu-length</B></DT><DD>
+    The desired animated main menu length in seconds
+<DT><B>-submenu-length</B></DT><DD>
+    The desired submenu length.  This will also affect the length of submenu
+    audio for static submenus.  (Assuming that -submenu-audio was passed in).
+    The default is to use 10 seconds of audio for static menus.
+<DT><B>-submenu-stroke</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    The color for the sub-menu font shadow
+<DT><B>-submenu-title-color</B>, <B>-submenu-title-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    The fill color used for sub-menu title fonts
+<DT><B>-submenu-titles</B></DT><DD>
+    You can supply a list of titles here for sub-menus without the length
+    restrictions found in thumb titles.  Must equal number of videos
+<DT><B>-chapters</B> [ NUM | CHAPTER POINTS in HH:MM:SS ]</DT><DD>
+    The number of chapters for each video (default: 6) OR
+    the actual chapter points in HH:MM:SS format.
+    Chapter points will be used for generating the submenu thumbs, and for
+    seeking with your DVD player.  You can pass in just one value that will
+    be used for all videos, or supply a list of values (number of chapters)
+    or time code strings.
+<P></P>
+    If you just pass an integer for 'number of chapters', then tovid will
+    make the chapter points for you by dividing the video length by the number
+    you supply.  If using the <B>-no-menu</B> option, the INT passed in will be
+    the chapter interval in minutes, rather than the above formula.
+<P></P>
+    If passing HH:MM:SS format you need to pass the string of chapter points for
+    each video and each string should have comma separated values.
+    Additionally, the first chapter should always start at 00:00:00 as
+    dvdauthor will add that if it is not there already.
+<P></P>
+    To get your time codes, you can play your videos in mplayer and press 'o'
+    to see them on-screen.  I have found these to be very accurate in my short
+    tests.  For greater frame accuracy you could try loading the file in
+    avidemux and find the time codes for the frames you want.
+<P></P>
+    If passing grouped chapters you need to join the chapters from all the
+    videos in a group with a '+' separator.  If you want to skip creating
+    chapters for a video in the group use '0' for its chapters.
+<P></P>
+    Note: chapters for grouped videos should probably be passed in using the
+    above HH:MM:SS format. (Arbitrary chapters using just an INT for the # of
+    chapters is not guaranteed to work reliably in all cases for grouped videos
+    at the moment.)
+<P></P>
+    Example for passing just number of chapters ( 4 videos ):
+<PRE>
+      -chapters 5 2 4 8
+</PRE>
+
+<P></P>
+    Example of passing chapter points ( 4 videos ):
+<PRE>
+      -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45 \
+      00:00:00,00:04:25.623,00:09:12,00:15:51 \
+      00:00:00,00:05:10,00:13:41,00:18:13.033 \
+      00:00:00,00:15:23.342,00:26:42.523
+</PRE>
+
+<P></P>
+    Example of passing grouped chapters using the '+' separator:
+<PRE>
+      -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45+00:04:23,00:09:35 \
+      00:00:00... etc.
+</PRE>
+
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-chapter-titles</B> LIST</DT><DD>
+    If you are using submenus, you can pass a list of titles for the
+    chapters.  Each title must be quoted, and the number of titles given
+    must equal the total number of chapters for all videos.  In other words
+    if you use -chapters 4 6 8 , you must give 18 chapter titles, in the same
+    order that the videos were passed in.  Note: if you are passing in options
+    on the command line to the 'tovid disc' GUI, you must repeat the option
+    <B>-chapter-titles</B> for each video, accompanied by its respective chapter
+    titles. (you can also choose to use this syntax for the todisc script.)
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-chapter-font</B> FONT</DT><DD>
+    Use FONT as the font for submenu chapters.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-chapter-fontsize</B> SIZE</DT><DD>
+    Use SIZE as the pointsize for the chapters font.
+<DT><B>-chapter-color</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    The color for the chapters font.
+<DT><B>-chapter-stroke</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    The color for the chapters font shadow
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-seek</B> NUM | "NUM1 NUM2 NUM3 . . ."</DT><DD>
+    Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails (default: 2.0 seconds)
+    If a quoted string of values matching the number of videos is used, then
+    each video can use a different seek value
+    If using switched menus, the <B>-seek</B> value(s) will be used to generate
+    the showcase image that displays on switching to another video choice with
+    the up/down arrow keys.
+<DT><B>-fast-seek</B></DT><DD>
+    Use faster seek method for ffmpeg.  This is not as accurate as the default
+    method, and may produce grey frames.
+<DT><B>-frame-safe</B>  Instead of seeking and then outputting one frame for</DT><DD>
+    previews and static menus, output 9 frames and choose the largest.  Not
+    frame accurate (may be as much as 9 frames off), but safer.  Choose this
+    if you are getting grey frames/thumbnails with some videos.  You can also
+    use it to try to get the 'best' frame.  This option
+    has no effect on submenus at present.
+<DT><B>-showcase-seek</B> NUM</DT><DD>
+    Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails for showcase video
+    (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT><B>-bgvideo-seek</B>, <B>-bg-video-seek</B> NUM</DT><DD>
+    Seek to NUM seconds before generating images for background video
+    (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT><B>-bgaudio-seek</B>, **-bg-audio-seek NUM</DT><DD>
+    Seek to NUM seconds before generating audio for bgaudio
+    (default: 2.0 seconds)
+<DT><B>-group</B> N VIDEO1 VIDEO2 . . .</DT><DD>
+    Allow grouping videos in dvdauthor.xml, so they will play sequentially as
+    a group.  The videos passed in after the 'N' will be grouped with the 'Nth'
+    video. Example:
+<P></P>
+<PRE>
+      -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+<P></P>
+    will group these 3 videos with the 2nd video given with <B>-files</B>, so that
+    they will play sequentially as one title.  Only one thumbnail and/or title
+    will appear on the menu for the group: it will be made from the 1st video
+    in the group.  In the above example if you passed:
+<PRE>
+      -files foo.mpg bar.mpg baz.mpg -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</PRE>
+
+    then the group will consist of bar.mpg  2.mpg, 3.mpg and 4.mpg, and only the
+    title and/or thumbnail for bar.mpg will appear in the menu.  You can use
+    <B>-group</B> more than once for multiple groups.  Be  sure to quote video
+    filenames if they contain  spaces.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc16"></A>
+<H2>Menu Style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-menu-title-geo</B> north|south|east|west|center [south]</DT><DD>
+    The position of the menu title.  You may need to use -align as well if
+    you don't want your title covering other parts of your menu.  See
+    <B>-align</B>
+<DT><B>-menu-title-offset</B> OFFSET (+X+Y)</DT><DD>
+    Move menu title by this offset from its N|S|E|W|Center position.  You
+    may need to use -align as well if you don't want your title covering other
+    parts of your menu.  See <B>-align</B>
+<DT><B>-button-style</B> line|rect|text|text-rect [line]</DT><DD>
+    The style of button that you will see when you play the DVD.
+    "line" style underlines the title, "rect" draws a rectangle around the
+    thumb when you select it in the DVD player, "text" highlights the video
+    title text, and "text-rect" draws a rectangle around the title
+    text.
+<DT><B>-title-color</B>, <B>-title-colour</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    Color to use for the main menu title.  For list of supported colors do:
+    <B>convert -list</B> color.  HTML notation may be used: "#ff0000". See:
+    <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php">http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php</A>
+<DT><B>-title-stroke</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    Shadow color for the main menu's title font. Use "none" for transparent
+    outline  (see title-color).  Note: this is not a -stroke in the sense that
+    imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow (the font is drawn twice).  To get
+    a true imagemagick stroke see <B>-title-font-deco</B>
+<DT><B>-title-font-deco</B>, <B>-title-fontdeco</B> "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"</DT><DD>
+    Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+    ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+    outlines, gradient fills, and many others. See <B>Usage notes</B>
+<DT><B>-titles-stroke</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    Shadow color for the thumb or textmenu video titles font. Use "none" for
+    transparent outline  (see <B>-titles-color</B>).  Note: this is not a -stroke
+    in the sense that imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow
+    (the font is drawn twice).  To get a true imagemagick stroke,
+    see <B>-titles-font-deco</B>
+<DT><B>-titles-font-deco</B>, <B>-titles-fontdeco</B> "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"</DT><DD>
+    Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+    ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+    outlines, gradient fills, and others. See <B>Usage notes</B> for more info.
+<DT><B>-highlight-color</B>, <B>-highlight-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to navigate.
+<DT><B>-select-color</B>, <B>-select-colour</B></DT><DD>
+    Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to select.
+<DT><B>-text-mist</B></DT><DD>
+    Put a semi-transparent misted background behind the text for the menu's
+    title, just slightly larger than the text area.
+<DT><B>-text-mist-color</B>, <B>-text-mist-colour</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    Color of the mist behind the menu's title (see title-color).
+<DT><B>-text-mist-opacity</B></DT><DD>
+    Opacity of the mist behind the menu's title - see <B>-opacity</B>
+<DT><B>-title-opacity</B></DT><DD>
+    Opacity of the menu title text
+<DT><B>-titles-opacity</B></DT><DD>
+    Opacity of the text for video titles
+<DT><B>-submenu-title-opacity</B></DT><DD>
+    Opacity of the text for submenu menu titles
+<DT><B>-chapter-title-opacity</B></DT><DD>
+    Opacity of the text for submenu chapter titles
+<DT><B>-menu-audio-fade</B></DT><DD>
+    Number of sec to fade given menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds)
+    If you use <B>-menu-audio-fade</B> 0 then the audio will not be faded.
+<DT><B>-submenu-audio-fade</B></DT><DD>
+    Number of secs to fade sub-menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds).
+    See <B>-menu-audio-fade</B>
+<DT><B>-intro</B> VIDEO</DT><DD>
+    Use a introductory video that will play before the main menu.
+    At present it must be a DVD compatible video at the correct resolution etc.
+    Only 4:3 aspect is supported: 16:9 will give unexpected results.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Style options specific to showcase/textmenu arrangements</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-text-start</B> N</DT><DD>
+    This option is for <B>-textmenu</B> menus.  The titles will start at the Nth
+    pixel from the top of the menu ( Y axis ).
+<DT><B>-title-gap</B> N</DT><DD>
+    This option is for <B>-textmenu</B> menus.  The gap is the space between
+    titles vertically ( Y axis ).
+<DT><B>-rotate</B> DEGREES</DT><DD>
+    Rotate the showcase image|video clockwise by DEGREES.
+    (default: if used without options, the rotate will be 5 degrees).  Note:
+    this will not turn a portait image into a landscape image!
+<DT><B>-showcase-geo</B> GEOMETRY</DT><DD>
+    The position of the showcase image.  ( +X+Y  position )
+    For example: <B>-showcase-geo</B> +300+200
+<DT><B>-wave</B> default|GEOMETRY</DT><DD>
+    Wave effect for showcase image|video.  Alters thumbs along a sine wave using
+    GEOMETRY. (default: no wave)
+    "default" will produce a wave arg of -20x556, which
+    produces a gentle wave with a small amount of distortion.
+    See: <A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave">http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave</A> if you want
+    to try other values.
+<DT><B>-showcase-shape</B>  egg|oval|plectrum|arch|spiral|galaxy|flat-tube|normal</DT><DD>
+    Apply a shaped transparency mask to showcase videos or images.
+    Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+    $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+    command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+    No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+<DT><B>-showcase-framestyle</B>  none|glass</DT><DD>
+    For -showcase-* style template only
+    "none" will use the default frame method, using "convert -frame . . ."
+    "glass" will use mplayer to make frames, which gives an interesting
+    animated effect to the frames, and can be much faster ( especially if you
+    don't use <B>-rotate</B> or <B>-wave</B> as thumbs will not need to be processed
+    again after mplayer spits them out.  Note: you need to be using either
+    <B>-showcase</B> IMAGE or <B>-showcase</B> VIDEO for this "frame style" to work.
+<DT><B>-showcase-frame-size</B> PIXELS</DT><DD>
+    The size of the showcase frame.  This value will be used for both width and
+    height for the 'thickness' of the frame.  This will also set the thickness
+    of the raised "frame" of the showcase thumb when you use <B>-3d-showcase</B>.
+    See also <B>-thumb-frame-size</B> and <B>-showcase-frame-color</B>
+<DT><B>-showcase-frame-color</B>, <B>-showcase-frame-colour</B> PIXELS</DT><DD>
+    The color of the showcase frame.  Use hexadecimal or named colors notation.
+    Remember to quote! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+<DT><B>-3d-showcase</B>, <B>-3dshowcase</B></DT><DD>
+    This will give an illusion of 3D to the showcase thumb: dynamic lighting on
+    rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs.  Try it !
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc17"></A>
+<H2>Thumbnail Style</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-user-thumbs</B> IMAGE(S)</DT><DD>
+    Supply your own images for menu buttons, rather than relying on todisc to
+    generate them from the video.  They must be the same aspect ratio as the
+    videos in the titleset (4:3 or 16:9), as todisc will resize them without
+    checking and cropping.  There must be on image for each thumb that will be
+    displayed on the menu (ie. one thumb for each video in a titleset).
+<DT><B>-opacity</B> [0-100] (default 100)</DT><DD>
+    Opacity of thumbnail videos as a percentage (no percent sign).
+    Anything less than 100(%) is semi-transparent. Not recommended with dark
+    backgrounds.
+<DT><B>-thumb-blur</B>, <B>-blur</B> NUM</DT><DD>
+    The amount of feather blur to apply to the thumb-shape.  The default is 1.0
+    which will more or less keep the shape and produces transparency at the
+    edges.  Choose float or integer values between 0.1 and 2.0. 3D thumbs are
+    set to a tiny blur, so this option doesn't affect the <B>-3dthumbs</B> option.
+<DT><B>-showcase-blur</B> NUM</DT><DD>
+    The amount of 'feather' blur to apply to the showcase image/video.  Choose
+    values between 0.1 and 2.0.  This option has no effect on <B>-3d-showcase</B>.
+    See <B>-thumb-blur</B> for more info.
+<DT><B>-align</B> DIRECTION</DT><DD>
+    This will align  thumbs/titles in DIRECTION, which is a compass direction
+    as used by imagemagick: ie. north|south|east|west|northeast|northwest etc.
+    If <B>-align</B> south then menu title will align north, unless you manually
+    set one or both of <B>-menu-title-geo</B> or <B>-menu-title-offset</B>.
+    Only <B>-align</B> north|south|center has any effect on showcase with thumb,
+    or with the default montage arrangement of central thumbs. The most
+    apparent changes with be with textmenu, though with 2 column arrangements
+    only the north* and south* changes will show an effect.
+<P></P>
+    Diagram:
+<DT>   . northwest   north   northeast .</DT><DD>
+<DT>   .                               .</DT><DD>
+<DT>   . west        center       east .</DT><DD>
+<DT>   .                               .</DT><DD>
+<DT>   . southwest   south    souteast .</DT><DD>
+<DT><B>-thumb-mist</B> [COLOR]</DT><DD>
+    Use a mist behind thumbnails.  The optional argument is the color of the
+    mist.  This option helps with contrast.  Be sure to set the font color
+    to an appropriate color if using a colored mist, and/or use a bold font.
+<DT><B>-titles-color</B>, <B>-titles-colour</B> COLOR</DT><DD>
+    Color to use for the thumb or textmenu titles.  If your titles are not
+    clear enough or look washed out, try using a <B>-titles-stroke</B> that
+    is the same color as used with <B>-titles-color</B>  (see <B>-title-color</B>)
+<DT><B>-showcase-titles-align</B> west|east (default: center [centre])</DT><DD>
+    The default is to center the text above the thumbnails.  This option will
+    align the titles either to the left (west) or right (east).  Aligning west
+    gives more space to the titles.  Aligning east also does so, and as well
+    will facilitate using \n in your titles to achieve multi line titles.
+<DT><B>-tile-3x1</B>, <B>-tile3x1</B></DT><DD>
+    Use a montage tile of 3x1 instead of the usual 2x2 for 3 videos
+    ie.
+<P></P>
+    [movie1] [movie2] [movie3] instead of:
+<P></P>
+    [movie1] [movie2]
+<P></P>
+    [movie3]
+<P></P>
+    This option only comes into play if the number of videos supplied equals 3
+    Otherwise it will be silently ignored. Not used for -showcase-* style.
+<DT><B>-tile-4x1</B>, <B>-tile4x1</B></DT><DD>
+    Same as <B>-tile-3x1</B> above, except use tile of 4x1. (one row of 4 videos)
+<DT>**-thumb-columns 3|4</DT><DD>
+    Same as <B>-tile-3x1</B> and tile-4x1** above, except it accepts either '3'
+    (1 row of 3 thumbs), or '4' (one row of 4 thumbs) as an argument.  This
+    alternative was added to help compact the gui layout.
+<DT><B>-rotate-thumbs</B> DEGREE LIST ( list of degrees, one for each thumb )</DT><DD>
+    Rotate thumbs the given amount in degrees - can be positive or negative.
+    There must be one value for each file given with <B>-files</B>.
+    If the values are not the same distance from zero, the thumbs will be of
+    different sizes as images are necessarily resized *after* rotating.  With
+    the default montage template - this will also resize the titles; with the
+    showcase template the titles will remain the same size. Example:
+<P></P>
+<PRE>
+      -rotate-thumbs -10 10 -10 10 -10  (for 5 files)
+</PRE>
+
+     **Note: this option will not turn a portrait image into a landscape image!
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc18"></A>
+<H2>Dvdauthor options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-loop</B> PAUSE</DT><DD>
+    Pause in seconds at end of menu.  Use "inf" if you wish indefinite pause.
+    Note: using "inf" with <B>-menu-fade</B> will disable the fadeout portion of
+    the fade.  (default: "inf" for static menu, 10.0 seconds for animated.)
+<DT><B>-playall</B></DT><DD>
+    This option will create a button on the main menu that will allow going
+    right to the 1st title and playing all videos in succession before
+    returning to the main menu.  If doing titlesets you can use this within
+    the <B>-vmgm</B> ... <B>-end-vmgm</B> options to allow playing ALL titlesets.
+    (If you want also to have a playall button in each titleset you could use
+    this option between each <B>-titleset</B> ... <B>-end-titleset</B> option or put
+    it outside of the vmgm and titlset options as a global option.
+<DT><B>-videos-are-chapters</B></DT><DD>
+    A button will be made on the main menu for each video, which you can use as
+    a chapter button.  Selecting any video will play them all in order
+    starting with the selected one.
+<DT><B>-chain-videos</B> NUM | N1-NN</DT><DD>
+    Without options this will chain all videos together so they play
+    sequentially without returning to the main menu, except for the last, which
+    will return.  You can also specify which videos you want to behave this way
+    by number or by a range. ( ie. <B>-chain-videos</B> 1 2 4-6 ).
+<DT><B>-subtitle-lang</B> "lang1 lang2 . . ."</DT><DD>
+    This allows selectable subtitles in the DVD, assuming you have optional
+    subtitles muxed into your videos.  Use 2 character language codes.
+<DT><B>-audio-channel</B> "Video1_track Video2_track Video3_track . . ."</DT><DD>
+    "VideoN_track" is the track number to use in a multi-track (multi-language)
+    mpeg: usually something like <B>-audio-channel</B> "1 0 1".  The 1st track is
+    0, 2nd is 1 . . . etc.  If the tracks are 0. English 1.French, then the
+    above would make French the audio language on Video1 and Video3, and
+    English the audio language on Video2.  You can check the mpeg with
+    "mplayer -v . . .".
+<DT><B>-audio-lang</B> LANGUAGE CODES</DT><DD>
+    Identify the audio tracks on the DVD.  These language codes are used for
+    each video in the titleset.  When you use the audio button on your DVD
+    remote the language name is displayed.  Example: <B>-audio-lang</B> en fr
+<DT><B>-aspect</B> 4:3|16:9</DT><DD>
+    This will output a &lt;video aspect WIDTH:HEIGHT /&gt; tag for the dvdauthor
+    xml file.  It will affect all videos in the titleset.  Example:
+<P></P>
+<PRE>
+      -aspect 16:9
+</PRE>
+
+<DT><B>-widescreen</B> nopanscan|noletterbox [nopanscan]</DT><DD>
+    This will output a &lt;video widescreen=nopanscan /&gt; tag (for example)
+    for the dvdauthor xml file.  It will affect all videos in the titleset. Use
+    in conjunction with <B>-aspect</B> if your dvd player is cropping your videos.
+    Example:
+<P></P>
+<PRE>
+      -aspect 16:9 -widescreen
+</PRE>
+
+<DT><B>-quick-nav</B></DT><DD>
+    This option will allow navigation of a menu with more than one titleset by
+    using the left and right arrow keys of your DVD remote.  When you press
+    this key the highlight will go the next or previous title.  If you are at
+    the end of a titleset the right key will go to the next titleset.  If you
+    are at the beginning of a titleset, the left key will go to the previous
+    titleset.  If no next or previous titleset it will cycle to the end or
+    beginning of the titlesets.
+<DT><B>-outlinewidth</B>, <B>-outline-width</B> WIDTH</DT><DD>
+    For spumux outlinewidth variable.  If there is a large gap between words in
+    a text button, this option may help.
+<DT><B>-video-pause</B> PAUSE (single value or list)</DT><DD>
+    The pause in seconds after playing a video title.  This is useful for
+    slideshows: the 'slide' will remain on the screen for this length of time.
+    If you have grouped videos you should probably not pause the videos that
+    have a grouped title after it, but instead see <B>-grouped-video-pause</B>.
+    Note: if you provide a list of values they must be one for each video.
+<DT><B>-group-video-pause</B> PAUSE (single value or list)</DT><DD>
+    The pause in seconds after a grouped video plays.  If you wish to pause
+    after the whole group finishes, then only use a value greater than zero
+    for the last video in the group.  If providing a list of values they must
+    equal the number of grouped videos.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc19"></A>
+<H2>Usage notes</H2>
+
+<P>
+The argument given to various *-font options that set the font to use must be
+one of the fonts listed by the command 'convert -list type'. Please note that
+many of your installed fonts may not be available; if you want to maximize the
+number of fonts available to todisc, download and run
+<A HREF="http://www.cit.gu.edu.au/~anthony/anthony.html">Anthony Thyssen's</A>
+<A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/scripts/imagick_type_gen">imagick_type_gen</A>
+script and run it like this:
+imagick_type_gen &gt; ~/.magick/type.xml.
+If that doesn't work, try imagick_type_gen &gt; ~/.magick/type.mgk.
+</P>
+<P>
+Or you can specify a ttf font file directly to the *-font options if you don't
+want to install fonts to ImageMagick.
+</P>
+<P>
+The *-stroke options in todisc are not a stroke in the sense that ImageMagick
+uses the term, but rather a font shadow (the text is drawn twice)  To get a
+truer Imagemagick -stroke try something like:
+-title-font-deco "-stroke black" (or -titles-font-deco "-stroke black").  The
+<B>-fontdeco</B> option is quite flexible and takes a lot of ImageMagick's
+<I>convert</I> options. Please refer to the tovid
+<A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Making_a_DVD_with_text_menus">wiki</A> and Anthony
+Thyssen's guide [<A HREF="http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage">http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage</A>] for further explanation and examples.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc20"></A>
+<H1>Command:mpg</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid mpg</B> converts arbitrary video files into (S)VCD/DVD-compliant
+MPEG format, suitable for burning to CD/DVD-R for playback on a
+standalone DVD player.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc21"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid mpg</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <B>-in</B> <I>INFILE</I> <B>-out</B> <I>OUTPREFIX</I>
+</P>
+<P>
+Where <I>INFILE</I> is any multimedia video file, and <I>OUTPREFIX</I> is what
+you want to call the output file, minus the file extension. <I>OPTIONS</I>
+are additional customizations, described below.
+</P>
+<P>
+By default, you will (hopefully) end up with an NTSC DVD-compliant
+MPEG-2 video file; if you burn this file to a DVD-R, it should be
+playable on most DVD players.
+</P>
+<P>
+For example:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid mpg -in foo.avi -out foo_encoded</CODE></DT><DD>
+    Convert 'foo.avi' to NTSC DVD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+<P></P>
+<DT><CODE>tovid mpg -pal -vcd foo.avi -out foo_encoded</CODE></DT><DD>
+    Convert 'foo.avi' to PAL VCD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc22"></A>
+<H2>Basic options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-v</B>, <B>-version</B></DT><DD>
+    Print tovid version number only, then exit.
+<DT><B>-quiet</B></DT><DD>
+    Reduce output to the console.
+<DT><B>-fake</B></DT><DD>
+    Do not actually encode; only print the commands (mplayer, mpeg2enc etc.)
+    that would be executed. Useful in debugging; have tovid give you the
+    commands, and run them manually.
+<DT><B>-ffmpeg</B></DT><DD>
+    Use ffmpeg for video encoding, instead of mplayer/mpeg2enc. Try this if
+    you have any problems with the default encoding method. Using this option,
+    encoding will be considerably faster. It can do almost everything that 
+    mpeg2enc does such as -filters and -subtitles by using a pipe from mplayer
+    though using these options will make encoding somewhat slower. The 
+    exceptions are some special options like -kvcd* -bdvd where you will still
+    need to use the default mpeg2enc option.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Television standards</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-ntsc</B></DT><DD>
+    NTSC format video (USA, Americas) (default)
+<DT><B>-ntscfilm</B></DT><DD>
+    NTSC-film format video
+<DT><B>-pal</B></DT><DD>
+    PAL format video (Europe and others)
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Formats</H3>
+
+<P>
+Standard formats, should be playable in most DVD players:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-dvd</B></DT><DD>
+    (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) DVD-compatible output (default)
+<DT><B>-half-dvd</B></DT><DD>
+    (352x480 NTSC, 352x576 PAL) Half-D1-compatible output
+<DT><B>-svcd</B></DT><DD>
+    (480x480 NTSC, 480x576 PAL) Super VideoCD-compatible output
+<DT><B>-dvd-vcd</B></DT><DD>
+    (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VCD-on-DVD output
+<DT><B>-vcd</B></DT><DD>
+    (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VideoCD-compatible output
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+Non-standard formats, playable in some DVD players:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-kvcd</B></DT><DD>
+    (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing video CD
+<DT><B>-kdvd</B></DT><DD>
+    (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+<DT><B>-kvcdx3</B></DT><DD>
+    (528x480 NTSC, 520x576 PAL) KVCDx3 specification
+<DT><B>-kvcdx3a</B></DT><DD>
+    (544x480 NTSC, 544x576 PAL) KVCDx3a specification (slightly wider)
+<DT><B>-bdvd</B></DT><DD>
+    (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) BVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+See <A HREF="http://kvcd.net/">kvcd.net</A> for details on the KVCD specification. Please
+note that KVCD ("K Video Compression Dynamics") is the name of a compression
+scheme that can be applied to any MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 video, and has little to
+do with VCD ("Video Compact Disc"), which is the name of a standard video disc
+format.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc23"></A>
+<H2>Advanced options</H2>
+
+<H3>Aspect ratios</H3>
+
+<P>
+tovid automatically determines aspect ratio of the input video by playing it in
+mplayer. If your video plays with correct aspect in mplayer, you should not
+need to override the default tovid behavior.
+</P>
+<P>
+If mplayer does not play your video with correct aspect, you may provide an
+explicit aspect ratio in one of several ways:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-full</B></DT><DD>
+    Same as <B>-aspect 4:3</B>
+<DT><B>-wide</B></DT><DD>
+    Same as <B>-aspect 16:9</B>
+<DT><B>-panavision</B></DT><DD>
+    Same as <B>-aspect 235:100</B>
+<DT><B>-aspect</B> <I>WIDTH</I><B>:</B><I>HEIGHT</I></DT><DD>
+    Custom aspect, where <I>WIDTH</I> and <I>HEIGHT</I> are integers.
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+The above are the intended INPUT aspect ratio. tovid chooses an optimal output
+aspect ratio for the selected disc format (VCD, DVD, etc.) and does the
+appropriate letterboxing or anamorphic scaling. Use <B>-widetv</B> to encode
+for a widescreen monitor or TV.
+</P>
+
+<H3>Video stream options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-quality</B> <I>NUM</I> (default 6)</DT><DD>
+    Desired output quality, on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 giving the best
+    quality at the expense of a larger output file. Default is 6. Output size
+    can vary by approximately a factor of 4 (that is, <B>-quality 1</B> output
+    can be 1/4 the size of <B>-quality 10</B> output). Your results may vary.
+    WARNING: With <B>-quality 10</B>, the output bitrate may be too high for
+    your hardware DVD player to handle. Stick with 9 or lower unless you
+    have phenomenally good eyesight.
+<P></P>
+    At present, this option affects both output bitrate and quantization (but
+    may, in the future, affect other quality/size-related attributes). Use
+    <B>-vbitrate</B> if you want to explicitly provide a maximum bitrate.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-vbitrate</B> <I>NUM</I></DT><DD>
+    Maximum bitrate to use for video (in kbits/sec). Must be within allowable
+    limits for the given format. Overrides default values. Ignored for VCD,
+    which must be constant bitrate.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-interlaced</B></DT><DD>
+    Do interlaced encoding of the input video (top fields first). Use this
+    option if your video is  interlaced, and you want to preserve as much
+    picture quality as possible. This option is ignored for VCD, which
+    doesn't support it.
+<P></P>
+    You can tell your source video is interlaced by playing it, and pausing
+    during a scene with horizontal motion; if you see a "comb" effect at the
+    edges of objects in the scene, you have interlaced video. Use this option
+    to encode it properly.
+<P></P>
+    If you would prefer to have output in progressive format, use
+    <B>-progressive</B>. If you have a DV camera, use <B>-interlaced_bf</B> since
+    DV footage is generally bottom fields first.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-interlaced_bf</B></DT><DD>
+    Do interlaced encoding of the input video (bottom fields first).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-deinterlace</B>, <B>-progressive</B></DT><DD>
+    Convert interlaced source video into progressive output video. Because
+    deinterlacing works by averaging fields together, some picture quality is
+    invariably lost. Uses an adaptive kernel deinterlacer (kerndeint), or,
+    if that's not available, the libavcodec deinterlacer (lavcdeint).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-mkvsub</B> <I>LANG</I> (EXPERIMENTAL)</DT><DD>
+    Attempt to encode an integrated subtitle stream (such as may be found in
+    Matroska .mkv files) in the given language code (eng, jpn, etc.) May work
+    for other formats.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-autosubs</B></DT><DD>
+    Automatically include subtitle files with the same name as the input video.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-subtitles</B> <I>FILE</I></DT><DD>
+    Get subtitles from <I>FILE</I> and encode them into the video.  WARNING: This
+    hard-codes the subtitles into the video, and you cannot turn them off while
+    viewing the video. By default, no subtitles are loaded. If your video is
+    already compliant with the chosen output format, it will be re-encoded to
+    include the subtitles. This works with both -ffmpeg and the default,
+    mpeg2enc.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-dvd-subtitles</B>, <B>-dvdsubs</B> | <I>FILE</I></DT><DD>
+    Get subtitles from <I>FILE(S)</I> and add them <B>as a subtitle stream</B> into the
+    video.  This allows selectable subtitles on your DVD. You can use more than
+    one file for multiple languages. Be sure to use the -subtitle-lang option
+    in 'tovid disc' so the name of the language will show up on the DVD instead
+    of 'UNKNOWN' or similar
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-dvdsubs-only</B></DT><DD>
+    Use this if you have an already complient MPEG and wish to add a subtitle
+    stream without re-encoding, using <B>-dvdsubs</B> ,
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-dvdsubs-fontsize</B> <I>NUM</I> [18]</DT><DD>
+    The pointsize in pixels for DVD selectable subtitles. To affect this for
+    hard-coded subtitles ( <B>-subtitles</B> ) you will need to pass options to
+    the player via <B>-mplayeropts</B> or <B>-mpvopts</B>.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-type</B> {live|animation|bw}</DT><DD>
+    Optimize video encoding for different kinds of video. Use 'live' (default)
+    for live-action video, use 'animation' for cartoons or anime, and 'bw' for
+    black-and-white video.  This option currently only has an effect with
+    KVCD/KSVCD output formats; other formats may support this in the future.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-safe</B> <I>PERCENT</I></DT><DD>
+    Fit the video within a safe area defined by <I>PERCENT</I>. For example,
+    <B>-safe 90%</B> will scale the video to 90% of the width/height of the output
+    resolution, and pad the edges with a black border. Use this if some of the
+    picture is cut off when played on your TV.  The percent sign is optional.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-filters</B> {none,denoise,deblock,contrast,all} (default none)</DT><DD>
+    Apply post-processing filters to enhance the video. If your input video is
+    very high quality, use 'none'. If your input video is grainy, use 'denoise';
+    if it looks washed out or faded, use 'contrast'. You can use multiple
+    filters separated by commas. To apply all filters, use 'all'. This works
+    with both mpeg2enc and -ffmpeg.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-fps</B> <I>RATIO</I></DT><DD>
+    Force input video to be interpreted as <I>RATIO</I> frames per second.  May be
+    necessary for some ASF, MOV, or other videos. <I>RATIO</I> should be an
+    integer ratio such as "24000:1001" (23.976fps), "30000:1001" (29.97fps), or
+    "25:1" (25fps). This option is temporary, and may disappear in future
+    releases. (Hint: To convert a decimal like 23.976 to an integer ratio, just
+    multiply by 1000, i.e. 23976:1000)
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-crop</B> <I>WIDTH</I>:<I>HEIGHT</I>:<I>X</I>:<I>Y</I></DT><DD>
+    Crop a portion of the video <I>WIDTH</I> by <I>HEIGHT</I> in size, with the
+    top-left corner at <I>X</I>, <I>Y</I>.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-widetv</B></DT><DD>
+    Always encode to 16:9 widescreen (only supported by <B>-dvd</B>, <B>-kdvd</B>,
+    <B>-bdvd</B>), for optimal viewing on a widescreen monitor or TV.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Audio stream options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-normalize</B></DT><DD>
+    Analyze the audio stream and then normalize the volume of the audio.
+    This is useful if the audio is too quiet or too loud, or you want to
+    make volume consistent for a bunch of videos. Similar to running
+    normalize without any parameters. The default is -12dB average level
+    with 0dB gain.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-amplitude</B> <I>NUM</I>[dB]</DT><DD>
+    In addition to analyzing and normalizing, apply the gain to the audio
+    such that the 'average' (RMS) sound level is <I>NUM</I>. Valid values
+    range 0.0 - 1.0, with 0.0 being silent and 1.0 being full scale. Use
+    <I>NUM</I>dB for a decibel gain below full scale (the default without
+    -amplitude is -12dB).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-abitrate</B> <I>NUM</I></DT><DD>
+    Encode audio at <I>NUM</I> kilobits per second.  Reasonable values include
+    128, 224, and 384. The default is 224 kbits/sec, good enough for most
+    encodings. The value must be within the allowable range for the chosen disc
+    format; Ignored for VCD, which must be 224.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-audiotrack</B> <I>NUM</I></DT><DD>
+    Encode the given audio track, if the input video has multiple audio tracks.
+    <I>NUM</I> is <I>1</I> for the first track, <I>2</I> for the second, etc. You may
+    also provide a list of tracks, separated by spaces or commas, for example
+    <B>-audiotrack 3,1,2</B>. Use <B>tovid id</B> on your source video to determine
+    which audio tracks it contains.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-downmix</B></DT><DD>
+    Encode all audio tracks as stereo.  This can save space on your DVD if
+    your player only does stereo.  The default behavior of tovid is to use
+    the original number of channels in each track.  For aac audio, downmixing
+    is not possible: tovid runs a quick 1 frame test to try to downmix the
+    input track with the largest number of channels, and if it fails then it
+    will revert to the default behavior of using the original channels.
+</DL>
+
+<H3>Other options</H3>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-config</B> <I>FILE</I></DT><DD>
+    Read configuration from <I>FILE</I>, containing 'tovid' alone on the first
+    line, and free-formatted (whitespace-separated) tovid command-line options
+    on remaining lines.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-force</B></DT><DD>
+    Force encoding of already-compliant video or audio streams.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-overwrite</B></DT><DD>
+    Overwrite any existing output files (with the same name as the given
+    <B>-out</B> option).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-priority</B> {low|medium|high}</DT><DD>
+    Sets the main encoding process to the given priority. With high priority,
+    it may take other programs longer to load and respond. With lower priority,
+    other programs will be more responsive, but encoding may take 30-40%
+    longer.  The default is high priority.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-discsize</B> <I>NUM</I></DT><DD>
+    When encoding, tovid automatically splits the output file into several
+    pieces if it exceeds the size of the target media. This option sets the
+    desired target DVD/CD-R size to <I>NUM</I> mebibytes (MiB, 2^20). By default,
+    splitting occurs at 700 for CD, 4300 for DVD. Use higher values at your
+    own risk. Use 650 or lower if you plan to burn to smaller-capacity CDs.
+    Doesn't work with the <B>-ffmpeg</B> option.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-fit</B> <I>NUM</I></DT><DD>
+    Fit the output file into <I>NUM</I> MiB. Rather than using default (or
+    specified) video bitrates, tovid will calculate the correct video bitrate
+    that will limit the final output size to <I>NUM</I> MiB. This is different
+    than <B>-discsize</B>, which cuts the final file into <I>NUM</I> MiB pieces.
+    <B>-fit</B> makes sure that the file never exceeds <I>NUM</I> MiB. This works
+    with <B>-ffmpeg</B>, but not with <B>-vcd</B> since VCDs have a standardized
+    constant bitrate.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-parallel</B></DT><DD>
+    Perform ripping, encoding, and multiplexing processes in parallel using
+    named pipes. Maximizes CPU utilization and minimizes disk usage. Note that
+    this option simply does more tasks simultaneously, in order to make better
+    use of available CPU cycles; it's unrelated to multi-CPU processing (which
+    is done automatically anyway). Has no effect when <B>-ffmpeg</B> is used.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-update</B> <I>SECS</I></DT><DD>
+    Print status updates at intervals of <I>SECS</I> seconds. This affects how
+    regularly the progress-meter is updated. The default is once every five
+    seconds.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-mpv</B></DT><DD>
+    Use mpv instead of mplayer. This option is experimental.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-mplayeropts</B> <I>OPTIONS</I></DT><DD>
+    Append <I>OPTIONS</I> to the mplayer command run during video encoding.  Use
+    this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+    manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail, so use
+    this with caution!
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-mpvopts</B> <I>OPTIONS</I></DT><DD>
+    Append <I>OPTIONS</I> to the mpv command run during video encoding.  Use
+    this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+    or mpv manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail,
+    so use this with caution!
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-nofifo</B> (EXPERIMENTAL)</DT><DD>
+    Do not use a FIFO pipe for video encoding. If you are getting "Broken pipe"
+    errors with normal encoding, try this option.  WARNING: This uses lots of
+    disk space (about 2 GB per minute of video).
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-keepfiles</B></DT><DD>
+    Keep the intermediate files after encoding. Usually, this means the audio
+    and video streams are kept (eg the .ac3 and .m2v files for an NTSC DVD).
+    This doesn't work with -parallel because the intermediate files are named
+    pipes, and not real files.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-slice</B> <I>START</I>-<I>END</I></DT><DD>
+    Encode a segment from <I>START</I> to <I>END</I> (in seconds). Only works with
+    -ffmpeg.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-from-gui</B></DT><DD>
+    Put makempg into a fully non-interactive state, suitable for calling from
+    a gui.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-noask</B></DT><DD>
+    Don't ask questions when choices need to be made. Assume reasonable
+    answers.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc24"></A>
+<H1>Command:id</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid id</B> identifies each multimedia video file in a
+list, and reports its compliance with video disc standards such as VCD,
+SVCD, and DVD.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc25"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid id</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>VIDEO_FILE(s)</I>
+</P>
+<P>
+For example:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id foo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -tabluar videos/*.mpg</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc26"></A>
+<H2>Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-terse</B></DT><DD>
+    Print raw video characteristics, no formatting. Helpful when
+    calling from other scripts.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-verbose</B></DT><DD>
+    Print extra information from mplayer, tcprobe, and ffmpeg.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-accurate</B></DT><DD>
+    Do lengthy play-time estimation by scanning through the entire video file.
+    Use this if the default behavior is giving you inaccurate play times.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-fast</B></DT><DD>
+    Skip lengthy play-time estimation, and go with what mplayer reports
+    as being the video duration. Unlike pre-0.32 versions of tovid, this
+    is now the default behavior, and the <B>-fast</B> option doesn't do anything.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-tabular</B></DT><DD>
+    Display output in a table format for easier comparison. Most useful
+    when identifying multiple video files.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-keepfiles</B></DT><DD>
+    Keep temporary directory for debugging.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-isformat</B> [<I>pal-dvd</I>|<I>ntsc-dvd</I>] (same syntax for vcd and svcd)</DT><DD>
+    Check <I>VIDEO_FILE</I> for compliance with the given disc format.
+    If <I>VIDEO_FILE</I> matches the given format, then <B>tovid id</B> reports "true"
+    and exits successfully. Otherwise, <B>tovid id</B> reports "false" and exits
+    with status 1 (failure).  This checks and reports both vcd/svcd/dvd
+    and pal/ntsc.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-mpv</B></DT><DD>
+    This option is mainly for testing. If you have only mpv installed instead
+    of mplayer, it is used automatically. With this option, you can have BOTH
+    installed and choose which one to use. (default: mplayer)
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc27"></A>
+<H2>Examples</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -verbose homevideo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+    Report everything mplayer, ffmpeg, and transcode can determine about
+    homevideo.avi.
+<P></P>
+<DT><CODE>tovid id -isformat dvd homevideo.mpg</CODE></DT><DD>
+    Check to see if homevideo.mpg is compliant with the DVD standard.
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc28"></A>
+<H1>Command:dvd</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid dvd</B> takes a DVD directory as generated by tovid with 'tovid disc' or
+one of the GUI frontends like 'tovid gui' or 'tovid titlesets' and burns
+it to appropriate media.  This will also work if the DVD directory is
+generated by the dvdauthor backend that tovid also uses.
+</P>
+<P>
+Running this program may slow down your other applications, due to intense
+disk activity.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc29"></A>
+<H2>Usage</H2>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid dvd</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>DVD_DIR</I>
+</P>
+<P>
+For example:
+</P>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid dvd /path/to/DVD/directory</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc30"></A>
+<H2>Options</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><B>-burn</B></DT><DD>
+    Burn a DVD file-system in <I>DVD_DIR</I> (must contain a VIDEO_TS folder).
+    This option is currently not necessary as the makedvd script ONLY burns
+    now that legacy scripts like makexml have been removed.  Left for
+    compatibility only.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-eject</B></DT><DD>
+    Eject the DVD tray after burning is complete. By default, the DVD is not
+    ejected.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-device</B> <I>DEVICE</I> (default /dev/dvdrw)</DT><DD>
+    Burn the disc image to <I>DEVICE</I>, the Linux device file-system
+    name of your DVD-recorder. Common examples might be /dev/dvdrw,
+    /dev/scd1, and /dev/hdc. You can also use a bus/id/lun triple
+    such as ATAPI:0,1,0
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-speed</B> <I>NUM</I> (default 1)</DT><DD>
+    Burn disc at speed <I>NUM</I>.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-label</B> <I>DISC_LABEL</I></DT><DD>
+    Uses <I>DISC_LABEL</I> as the volume ID. This appears as the mount
+    name of the disc on some computer platforms. Must be &lt;=32
+    alphanumeric digits without spaces.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-quiet</B></DT><DD>
+    Limit output to essential messages.
+<P></P>
+<DT><B>-noask</B></DT><DD>
+    Don't ask interactive questions and assume answers that will continue
+    execution.
+</DL>
+
+<P>
+    After burning, the DVD can be previewed by calling:
+    <I><B>xine</B> dvd:/path/to/output/directory</I>
+    or:
+    <I><B>vlc</B> /path/to/output/directory</I>
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc31"></A>
+<H1>Command:chapters</H1>
+
+<P>
+<B>tovid chapters</B> will start a GUI using mplayer to set chapter points in a
+video.  If the video plays through and you want to add more chapters you can
+press the play button again, but remember that new chapter points will be
+appended (in correct sequential order).  It will display the resulting chapter
+points, and also output to a terminal (useful for scripts).  As well it will
+give the option of saving the chapters string to a text file.
+</P>
+<P>
+Note that the 'tovid gui' now features a similar widget when you press the
+chapters button on the opening page.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="toc32"></A>
+<H2>Examples</H2>
+
+<DL>
+<DT><CODE>tovid chapters foo.avi</CODE></DT><DD>
+<P></P>
+<DT><CODE>chapters=$(tovid chapters /home/grepper/videos/foo.avi)</CODE></DT><DD>
+</DL>
+
+<A NAME="toc33"></A>
+<H1>CONTACT</H1>
+
+<P>
+For further assistance, contact information, forum and IRC links,
+please refer to the <A HREF="http://tovid.wikia.com/">tovid homepage</A>.
+</P>
+
+<!-- html code generated by txt2tags 2.6 (http://txt2tags.org) -->
+<!-- cmdline: txt2tags -t html -\-toc -\-toc-level 2 docs/src/en/tovid.t2t -->
+</BODY></HTML>
​

tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/docs/src/en/tovid.wiki Added

@@ -0,0 +1,1663 @@
+'''tovid manual'''
+
+
+
+
+----
+
+__TOC__
+
+----
+
+
+== Name ==
+
+tovid: Make DVDs from video files
+
+== Description ==
+
+'''tovid''' is a command-line tool for creating DVDs. It can encode your video
+files to DVD-compliant MPEG format, generate simple or complex DVD menus,
+author and burn a ready-to-watch DVD, with just a few shell commands. A
+graphical interface is also provided to make the process even easier.
+
+'''NOTE''': As of tovid 0.35, the legacy scripts '''makemenu''' and '''makexml'''
+have been removed and no longer appear in this manpage.
+All of their functions and more can be done with the 'tovid disc' command,
+(todisc script). See '''Command:disc''' and the [http://tovid.wikia.com wiki]
+for more info.
+
+Also note that as of tovid 0.32, this is the only manual page provided by tovid.
+There is now a single executable frontend to all functionality in the suite, so
+if you were expecting to find manpages for '''todisc''', '''idvid''', '''makempg'''
+and their kin, they can all be found in the '''tovid''' manpage you are reading now.
+And yes, this makes for a pretty large manual page. If you are viewing this
+manpage from the command-line '''man''' utility, which normally pages through the
+'''less''' utility, you can skip to a section by searching with the '''/''' key,
+followed by a '''^''' to match the given section name. For example, to skip to
+the '''mpg''' command, type '''/^Command:mpg'''. See '''man less''' for more on how
+to navigate.
+
+== Usage ==
+
+'''tovid''' ''COMMAND'' [''OPTIONS'']
+
+Where ''COMMAND'' is one of the following:
+
+ Main Commands
+
+; '''disc'''
+: Encode, make menus, author, burn. (was '''todisc'''. See '''Command:disc''')
+; '''gui'''
+: Start the tovid GUI (was '''todiscgui'''. See '''Command:gui''')
+; '''titlesets'''
+: A GUI wizard for multiple titlesets. (new: See '''Command:titlesets''')
+
+ Helper Commands
+
+; '''mpg'''
+: Encode videos to MPEG format (was '''tovid'''. See '''Command:mpg''')
+; '''dvd'''
+: Author and/or burn a DVD (was '''makedvd'''. See '''Command:dvd''')
+; '''id'''
+: Identify one or more video files (was '''idvid'''. See '''Command:id''')
+; '''chapters'''
+: A GUI using mplayer for setting chapter points. It will return a string of
+: chapter points to the terminal, in a format recognized by 'tovid disc'
+: (todisc) or by 'tovid gui', for the '''-chapters''' option.
+
+The ''OPTIONS'' differ for each command; run '''tovid <command>''' with no
+further arguments to get help on a command, and what options it expects.
+
+== Configuration ==
+
+Two configuration files are created the first time you run tovid:
+
+; '''~/.tovid/preferences'''
+: Defines working directory for all scripts.
+: You can define the output directory for makempg here.
+: The 'ffmpeg' executable can be set here: ffmpeg or avconv (TOVID_FFMPEG)
+; '''~/.tovid/tovid.ini'''
+: Includes command-line options that should be passed to the various
+: '''tovid''' sub-commands. Note: each sub-command has its own section,
+: starting with the line [sub-command], for example:
+<pre>
+ [disc]
+ ; -no-warn
+ -static
+ -no-ask
+</pre>
+
+
+Edit these files if you wish to change your configuration.
+
+The following environment variables are also honoured:
+
+<pre>
+ TOVID_HOME (directory containing preferences: ~/.tovid)
+ TOVID_WORKING_DIR (working directory for all scripts).
+ TOVID_OUTPUT_DIR (output directory for the makempg script).
+ TOVID_FFMPEG_CMD (the 'ffmpeg' executable to use: ffmpeg or avconv)
+</pre>
+
+These will override 'TOVID_HOME', 'WORKING_DIR', 'OUTPUT_DIR',
+and 'TOVID_FFMPEG' if set in ~/.tovid/preferences.
+
+== Command:gui ==
+
+== Usage ==
+
+'''tovid gui''' [''OPTIONS'']
+
+'''tovid gui''' starts the graphical user interface (GUI) for tovid. This is
+the easiest way to start creating DVDs with tovid. The optional arguments
+''OPTIONS'' are any option used by todisc ('tovid disc') which will save
+entering it manually, OR the full path to a saved script from the GUI.
+You can also combine these, but the script must be the FIRST option
+directly after '''tovid gui''' . (This option to save the contents of your
+project allows you to use it as a bash script later, or to reload the
+project to continue working with it at another time.)
+
+'''tovid gui''' will also take the option '''--position''', which denotes the
+screen position that the GUI will start at, in the form '+X+Y', similar to
+this part of the Xorg -geometry string.
+
+All help is integrated in the form of tooltips. You can also see
+**Command:disc ** for more detail about the options. Note: if you wish to use
+a GUI to make multiple titlesets on the same DVD use '''*tovid titlesets*''',
+which is a wizard that uses the the 'tovid gui. See '''*Command:titlesets*'''.
+
+Please note that although the interface may seem complex with so many options,
+you can create a fully functional DVD with only a few options on the opening
+tab of the GUI (select video files and an output name).
+
+== Command:titlesets ==
+
+'''tovid titlesets''' will assist in making a DVD with multiple titlesets. It can
+be started without any options, or you can feed it the path to a saved titleset
+script as an option. The option to save a script is also useful as the resulting
+script can be run later from a terminal.
+
+== Command:disc ==
+
+'''tovid disc''' creates a DVD file-system with optional menus, from a list of
+multimedia video files and their titles. As todisc can function as a master
+script, calling other scripts as it needs them, it is the easiest command line
+program for creating a DVD from start to finish, including automatically
+converting non-compliant videos and prompting to burn at completion. It can do
+animated menus, static thumbnail menus, text-only menus, or author with no menu.
+In addition, it can do slideshows, using images as input, and even combine
+slideshows with videos. It supports sub-menus for chapter breaks,
+configurable menu style, animated backgrounds and transparency effects.
+From simple (no menu) to complex (switched menus and titlesets), you should
+be able to do what you want with 'tovid disc'.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+<pre>
+ tovid disc [OPTIONS] \
+ -files <file list> -titles <title list>
+ -out mydvd
+</pre>
+
+For example:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -files File1.mpg File2.mpg File3.mpg \
+ -titles "Episode 1" "Episode 2" "Episode 3" \
+ -out Season_one
+</pre>
+
+The number of '''-files''' and '''-titles''' must be equal, though if you do not
+include any titles '''tovid disc''' will use the basename of the included files
+as titles. If you are doing a slideshow or multiple slideshows, use
+'''-slides''' rather than '''-files''' for passing in the images. You may use
+-files and -slides more than once to create an ordering in a mixed
+slideshows/videos menu. See Slideshows part of Usage section, below.
+
+If the input files are not mpeg, you will have the option to auto-encode them.
+
+General Options
+
+'''At present there are 2 display arrangements or "templates":'''
+
+; A. (Default)
+: Thumbs will be centred, and as large as space restraints allow.
+: 
+; B. '''-showcase''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: Produces an arrangement with small buttons on
+: the side and the showcase image/video in the centre. If no IMAGE or VIDEO
+: argument is supplied, the central thumb will be omitted.
+: 
+: Note: '''-textmenu''', '''-quick-menu''' and '''-switched-menus''' are all types
+: of showcase style menus. See descriptions under '''Menu style''' section.
+
+The '''-titles''' arguments should be double or single quoted, or have the spaces
+backslash-escaped. Special characters (like ", !, *, &, ?) may need to be
+backslash-escaped. To include a quoted string within a title, backslash-escape
+the quotes. These titles are used for labelling thumbnails on the main menu,
+and for the submenu title for that video. ( see also '''-submenu-titles''' )
+
+The '''-showcase''' styles can use longer titles than the default arrangement.
+With a showcase style, use: '''-showcase-titles-align west''' to give more space
+for the title, or use '''-showcase-titles-align east''' to allow titles of more
+than one line.
+
+The default style can only show about 16 characters (depending on the number
+of thumbs, and what '''-titles-font''' and '''-titles-fontsize''' is being used).
+If your titles are too long to fit in the label area, you may try using
+sub-menus, which can display longer titles, for example:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -submenus \
+ -files file1.mpg file2.mpg ... \
+ -titles "Short 1" "Short 2" \
+ -submenus \
+ -submenu-titles "Long Title One" "Long Title Two" \
+ -out foo
+
+</pre>
+
+The '''-align''' argument will position both titles and thumbs either south,
+north east, west, southwest, northwest, southeast, northeast, subject to
+certain constraints of each arrangement. For example a showcase style with
+a showcase thumb can only do north|south|center.
+
+More Examples:
+
+A text-only menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -textmenu ...
+</pre>
+
+No menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid -nomenu -files file1.mpg file2.mp4 "file 3.avi" -out mydvd
+</pre>
+
+'''Titlesets'''
+
+A word should be mentioned here about titlesets, which is really just a
+hierarchy of menus. You need to use titlesets, for example, if you have videos
+of different resolutions, or otherwise want to arrange videos on separate menus.
+If you want to have titlesets you need to put all the options for each titleset
+menu you would like to have between '''-titleset''' and '''-end-titleset''' options.
+
+Additionally, for the main menu (the opening menu that will let you jump to
+each titleset), you need to put options between '''-vmgm''' and '''-end-vmgm'''.
+You do not use '''-files''' for the opening menu options ('''-vmgm'''), but you
+will need as many TITLES after '''-titles''' as you have menus.
+
+Any options outside the '''-titleset''' '''-end-titleset''' and '''-vmgm'''
+'''-end-vmgm''' areas will be global options applying to every titleset.
+If a global option is duplicated inside a '''-titleset''' or '''-vmgm''' area, the
+global option will be overridden.
+
+Note: you do not need titlesets for a single menu with chapter break menus, for
+that just use '''-submenus''' or '''-ani-submenus'''
+
+Example of using '''tovid disc''' with titlesets:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -static -out MY_DVD \
+ \
+ -titleset \
+ -files 1.mpg 2.mpg 3.mpg \
+ -titles "Title One" "Title Two" "Title Three" \
+ -end-titleset \
+ \
+ -titleset \
+ -files 4.mpg 5.mpg \
+ -titles "Title Four" "Title Five" \
+ -background foo.jpg \
+ -showcase bar.png \
+ -end-titleset \
+ \
+ -vmgm \
+ -titles "Season One" "Season Two" \
+ -background bg.jpg \
+ -bgaudio foo.mp3 \
+ -titles-fontsize 20 \
+ -end-vmgm
+</pre>
+
+See also '''-titleset''' and '''-vmgm'''
+
+'''Slideshows'''
+
+You can also use '''tovid disc''' to make slideshows. This can either be a single
+slideshow, or multiple slideshows on the same menu.
+Remember to use '''-slides''' rather than '''-files''' for passing in the
+images. Images can be any filetype that imagemagick supports: for example
+JPEG, PNG, GIF, TGA BMP etc. For a single slideshow do not use '''-titles''':
+use -menu-title to set the slideshow title.
+
+For a single slideshow the default is an animated menu that transitions from
+slide to slide. The default transition type is 'crossfade', which fades each
+slide into the next and loops back to the first slide at the end. If instead
+you use '''-static''', then a static 'polaroid stack' menu of all the slides is
+created, with a single spumux'ed button for navigating with the enter key. You
+may have to experiment to find out which DVD remote button advances the slides.
+Try the 'next chapter'(skip ?) button and the play or enter buttons.
+If you want to limit the number of slides in the menu to a subset of all files
+entered with '''-slides''', then use '''-menu-slide-total''' INT. Be sure to use
+a long enough audio file for '''-bgaudio''' or set '''-menu-length''' so the menu
+is long enough to support the slides plus transitions.
+
+You can also put multiple slideshows on one menu. To do this, use
+'''-slides IMAGES''' for each slideshow desired. You can even mix videos
+with slideshows by using '''-files''' '''-slides''' '''-titles''' multiple times.
+
+Example of a single slideshow with an animated menu with transitions:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" -slides images/*.jpg \
+ -menu-slide-total 20 -slide-transition crossfade -bgaudio slideshow.wav \
+ -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+Example of multiple slideshows on one menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+ -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+ -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+ -slides photos/november/*.jpg \
+ -tile3x1 -rotate -5 5 -5 -align center \
+ -bgaudio background.wav \
+ -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+Example of mixed videos and slideshows:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+ -files fall_fair.mov \
+ -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+ -files harvest.mpg \
+ -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+ -titles "Fall Fair" "September" "Harvest" "October" \
+ -background autumn.png \
+ -bgaudio bg.mp3 \
+ -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+See the other slideshow options in the Slideshows options section.
+
+'''Encoding Options'''
+
+These are options for reencoding your non-compliant videos. They are passed
+directly to the '''tovid mpg''' command which is invoked by '''tovid disc''' when
+non-compliant files are found. For details, see the '''Command:mpg''' section.
+Here is a list of possible options you can pass:
+ '''-config''', '''-ntscfilm''', '''-dvd-vcd''', '''-half-dvd''', '''-kvcd''',
+ '''-kvcdx3''', '''-kvcdx3a''', '''-kdvd''', '''-bdvd''', '''-704''', '''-normalize''',
+ '''-amplitude''', '''-overwrite''', '''-panavision''', '''-force''', '''-fps''',
+ '''-vbitrate''', '''-quality''', '''-safe''', '''-crop''', '''-filters''',
+ '''-abitrate''', '''-priority''', '''-deinterlace''', '''-progressive''',
+ '''-interlaced''', '''-interlaced_bf''', '''-type''', '''-fit''', '''-discsize''',
+ '''-parallel''', '''-mkvsub''', '''-autosubs''', '''-subtitles''', '''-update''',
+ '''-mplayeropts''', '''-audiotrack''', '''-downmix''', '''-ffmpeg''', '''-nofifo''',
+ '''-from-gui''', '''-slice''', '''-quiet''',
+ '''-fake''', '''-keepfiles'''
+
+=== General Options ===
+
+; '''-keep-files''', '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep all intermediate/temporary files (helps with debugging)
+; '''-no-ask''' | '''-noask'''
+: Skip all interactive questions. No preview, automatic re-encoding with
+: tovid if needed, no interactive option to use background video for bgaudio.
+; '''-no-warn''', '''-nowarn'''
+: Don't pause after outputting warning or info messages
+; '''-jobs'''
+: By default, '''tovid disc''' starts a parallel job for each processor
+: detected. With this option you can manually set the number of jobs. For
+: example if you have a computer with 2 CPUs you can set "-jobs 1" to keep
+: one processor free for other things. At present this applies to the time
+: consuming imagemagick loops: you will notice a substantial speedup now if
+: you have a multi-cpu system.
+; '''-grid'''
+: Show a second preview image with a grid and numbers that will help in finding
+: coordinates for options that might use them, like '''-text-start'''
+; '''-no-confirm-backup'''
+: This option is for when your DVD contains images for a slideshow.
+: Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature. Todisc is
+: unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+: and backup your images, as you would with any beta software. Todisc
+: will prompt you to backup your files normally. If you have already backed
+: up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+: 
+: ==Options==
+: 
+; '''-ntsc'''
+: 720x480 output, compatible with NTSC standard (default)
+; '''-pal'''
+: 720x576 output, compatible with PAL standard
+; '''-submenus'''
+: Create a sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: no sub-menus)
+; '''-ani-submenus'''
+: Create an animated sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: not
+: animated)
+; '''-no-menu | -nomenu'''
+: With this option todisc will just create a DVD file system, ready for
+: burning, with NO MENU, just the supplied video files. These do not need
+: to be compliant, as non-compliant files will be encoded as usual. The
+: '''-out''' option is not required. Each video will be a chapter unless
+: '''-chapters''' OPTION is passed. The '''-chapters''' option is a number
+: indicating the chapter interval in minutes, or a HH:MM:SS string
+: indicating chapter points. See '''-chapters'''
+; '''-encode-only'''
+: This option was originally meant for the GUI, to allow it to be used for
+: just encoding rather than making a DVD structure. But it works well from
+: the command line as well as it has the added advantage that you can input
+: a list of files. Remember any makempg ('tovid mpg') options you use will
+: be passed on to the makempg script when encoding.
+
+=== Menu style ===
+
+; '''-showcase''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: If used without an argument, use showcase style without a central thumb.
+: This is a different arrangement of images for the menu: small thumbnails
+: go at left (and right) side of screen, with a larger image in the centre.
+: Maximum of 10 videos. If the provided argument is a video file, the
+: central thumb will be animated (regardless of whether '''-static''' is part
+: of the command line). Only 4:3 or 16:9 videos and images are accepted for
+: for the showcase file: if not one of these todisc will assume it is the
+: aspect ratio as the videos in the titleset.
+; '''-textmenu''', '''-text-menu''' NUM
+: If used without an argument, create a textmenu out of the supplied titles
+: The optional argument specifies how many titles are in the 1st column,
+: i.e. giving 4 titles and using "-textmenu 2" would make 2 columns of 2
+: titles. The default is to put all titles up to 13 in the first column
+: before starting a second column. Maximum: 2 columns and 26 titles.
+: Note that column 2 titles are justified to the left unless you add
+: '''-edge-justify''' to the command line. The menu will be static if no video
+: files are supplied with either '''-background''' or '''-showcase''' options.
+; '''-quick-menu'''
+: If you are using ffmpeg 0.8 or newer you can use this option. This will
+: make a very quick menu by using ffmpeg instead of imagemagick.
+: There are two choices: you can either use '-showcase IMAGE|VIDEO' or
+: '-background VIDEO'. There are no fancy effects like '''-wave'''
+: or '''-rotate''' available for it, but it is extremely fast. It will be a
+: text-menu style of menu, with no video thumbs, and a central showcase
+: IMAGE(static) | VIDEO(animated).
+: (i) see '''-bg-color''' if you are not using a '''-background''' and want to
+: change the default. (default is dark blue for -quick-menu arrangements). )
+: (ii) Note: todisc will still work with 'vhooks' if you have an old ffmpeg
+: with vhooks compiled in.
+: 
+: Specifying the IMAGE|VIDEO argument to '''-showcase''' is mandatory for this
+: style of menu, unless used in conjunction with '''-switched-menus'''
+: in which case the videos passed with '''-files''' automatically become the
+: showcase videos. If '''-quick-menu''' is used in combination with
+: '''-switched-menus''' it really speeds up an otherwise time consuming process.
+: 
+: Example:
+<pre>
+ -quick-menu -showcase /home/grepper/showcase.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: See '''-switched-menus''' for example of making switched menus with
+: '''-quick-menu'''
+: 
+; '''-bg-color''', '''-bg-colour'''
+: The color to use for the menu background. (default: ntsc-safe black)
+: Note: use a color a great deal darker than you want, as it appears quite
+: a bit lighter in the video version. You can use hexadecimal ('#ffac5f')
+: notation or named colors ('Lime'). convert -list color will show them.
+: See [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php colors] for more details.
+; '''-submenu-bg-color''', '''-submenu-bg-colour'''
+: The color to use as background for the submenu(s).
+: (default: ntsc-safe black) See '''-bg-color'''
+; '''-static'''
+: Main menu will consist of static thumbnail links. (default: animated)
+: If you use a video for -showcase or -background then it will still be
+: a 'moving' menu, in spite of the static buttons. This option also does
+: double duty for the '''-switched-menus''' option, and will create static
+: "switched" images.
+: See also '''-switched-menus'''
+; '''-background''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: Menu background. This can be a image file or an video file. If it is a
+: video file the background will be animated. Pick a file of correct aspect
+: ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to 4:3 aspect ratio.
+: It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+; '''-submenu-background''' IMAGE
+: Submenu background. This can be only be an image file. Pick a file of
+: correct aspect ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to
+: 4:3 aspect ratio. It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+; '''-menu-title'''
+: Title for the root menu - may be longer than thumbnail labels
+: Also if you use \n in the title, you can use multi line titles, but you
+: would need to adjust '''-title-fontsize''' to something smaller than default
+: for example:
+: 
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc ... -menu-title "A\nMultilined\nTitle" -title-fontsize 24
+</pre>
+
+; '''-title-font''', '''-menu-font''' FONT
+: Font to use for titles, either by ImageMagick font name (ex., "Arial") or
+: explicit pathname (ex., "/full/path/to/arial.ttf"). To see a complete
+: list of acceptable ImageMagick font names, run '''convert -list type''', and
+: refer to the leftmost column
+; '''-title-fontsize''', '''-menu-fontsize'''
+: Font size for main menu - best to -preview if you use this
+; '''-submenu-font'''
+: Font to use for the sub-menu main titles. See '''-title-font'''
+; '''-submenu-fontsize'''
+: Font size for the sub-menu main titles
+; '''-menu-fade''' ['BACKGROUND DURATION']
+: Fade the menu in and out The background will fade in first, then title (and
+: mist if called for), then the menu thumbs. The fadeout is in reverse
+: order. 'BACKGROUND DURATION' is an integer denoting the amount of time
+: the background will play before the menu begins to fade in. This can allow
+: you to do a 'transition' to the menu: if you supply a -background VIDEO it
+: will play for the indicated time before the menu fades in. Leave the
+: optional argument empty (just '''-menu-fade''') to get the default behavior
+: of showing the background for 1 second before fading the menu in. To
+: disable the fadeout portion, use ''''-loop''' inf'. See also:
+: '''-transition-to-menu''' and '''-loop'''
+; '''-transition-to-menu'''
+: This option goes with the '''-menu-fade''' option above, which must be
+: enabled for it to have effect. It is a convenience option for animated
+: backgrounds: the background will become static at the exact point the
+: thumbs finish fading in. This menu does not loop unless you pass
+: '''-loop''' VALUE. See also: '''-loop'''
+; '''-bgaudio''', '''-bg-audio*''' FILE
+: An file containing audio for the main menu background. For static menus
+: the default is to use 20 seconds of audio. You can change this using the
+: '''-menu-length''' option.
+; '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S)
+: List of files for sub-menu audio backgrounds. If one file is given, then
+: it will be used for all sub-menus. Otherwise the number given must equal
+: the number of submenus, though the keyword "none" in this list may be used for
+: silence. See also '''-submenu-length'''
+; '''-titleset''' . . . '''-end-titleset'''
+: If you have more than one titleset, put options for each titleset between
+: '''-titleset''' and '''-end-titleset'''. A separate menu will be created that
+: can be accessed from the main menu (VMGM). You can create this main menu
+: using the '''-vmgm''' '''-end-vmgm''' options. See '''-vmgm''' below and
+: TITLESET paragraph opening '''Usage''' section.
+; '''-vmgm''' . . . '''-end-vmgm'''
+: The VMGM menu is the root menu when you use titlesets.
+: Put your VMGM menu options between '''-vmgm''' and '''-end-vmgm'''.
+: You only need '''-titles''' "Titleset One title" "Titleset Two title"
+: . . . , and not '''-files'''.
+: Any other options can be used, but the menu will be a textmenu style by
+: default. '''Hint''': use '''-showcase''' IMAGE/VIDEO to create a fancier
+: VMGM menu.
+; '''-no-vmgm-menu''', '''-no-vmgm'''
+: This will skip the creation of a VMGM ( root menu ) for titlesets. The DVD
+: will start with the first titleset. You can not use this option unless also
+: using '''-quick-nav''' as you would not have a way to get to other titlesets.
+; '''-skip-vmgm'''
+: Start DVD from the first titleset instead of the VMGM ( root ) menu.
+; '''-switched-menus''', '''-switched-menu'''
+: This will make a "switched menu": there will be a central image where the
+: showcase image would go, and text menu titles along the menu edge where
+: textmenu titles go. As you select a video title with the down or up arrow
+: on your DVD remote, the image in the centre will change to the image or
+: video made from that selected video. Do not use '''-showcase''' IMAGE/VIDEO
+: with this option.
+: 
+: This can be a time consuming process for making animated menus as you need
+: to make a separate menu for each video provided with '''-files'''. The
+: process can be greatly sped up by using '''-quick-menu''' in conjunction with
+: this, though you will lose fancy options like '''-rotate''' and '''-wave'''.
+: 
+: Note that if you want to just have a static rather than an 'animated'
+: image, add '''-static''' to the command line.
+: 
+: Example for using with '''-quick-menu''':
+<pre>
+ -switched-menus -quick-menu
+</pre>
+
+
+=== Thumbnail style ===
+
+; '''-titles-font''' FONT
+: Display thumbnail or textmenu titles in the given font
+; '''-titles-fontsize''' POINTS
+: Font size to use for thumbnail or textmenu titles
+; '''-thumb-shape'''
+: normal|oval|vignette|plectrum|arch|spiral|blob|star|flare
+: Apply a shaped transparency mask to thumbnail videos.
+: These "feathered" shapes look best against a plain background (or used
+: in conjunction with '''-thumb-mist''' [COLOR]). For this rectangular
+: semi-transparent misted background for each thumb: see '''-thumb-mist'''.
+: Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+: $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+: command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+: (i.e ~/.tovid/masks/tux.png becomes -thumb-shape tux)
+: No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+; '''-thumb-frame-size''' INT
+: The size (thickness) of the thumb frames in pixels. This will also set the
+: thickness of the raised "frame" of thumbs when you use '''-3d-thumbs'''.
+: See also '''-showcase-frame-size''' and '''-thumb-frame-color'''
+; '''-thumb-frame-color''', '''-thumb-frame-colour''' COLOR
+: The color of frames for video thumbnails. Use hexadecimal or named colors
+: notation. Remember to quote if using hexadecimal! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+; '''-3d-thumbs''', '''-3dthumbs'''
+: This will give an illusion of 3D to the thumbnails: dynamic lighting on
+: rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs. Try it !
+
+=== Slideshows ===
+
+; '''-slides''' IMAGES
+: Use '''-slides''' IMAGES to pass in images for a slideshow. The default is
+: to make an animated menu of the slides, moving from one slide to the
+: next. If you use '''-static''', a 'polaroid stack' montage is created. This
+: composites the slides onto the background in 'random' locations with random
+: rotations. '''-slides''' IMAGES can be used multiple times if you wish to
+: make a menu with multiple slideshows. You can also make a menu
+: of mixed videos and slideshows by using '''-slides''' IMAGES, and '''-files'''
+: VIDEOS multiple times. For such a menu, the number of '''-titles'''
+: needs to match the number of '''-files''' passed in plus the number of
+: slideshows. (Each time you use '''-slides''' counts as one title.) To use
+: a transition between the slides, use '''-slide-transition'''
+: crossfade|fade. See '''-slide-transition''' '''-menu-slide-total'''
+: 
+; '''-menu-slide-total''' INT
+: Use INT number of the slides that were passed in with '''-slides'''
+: to make the animated or static slide menu. The length of the menu is
+: determined by 1) '''-menu-length''' NUM if given, and by 2) the length
+: of the audio from '''-bgaudio'''. For submenu slideshows, it is determined
+: by 1) '''-submenu-length''' NUM if given, and by 2) the length of the
+: audio from '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S).
+: 
+; '''-submenu-slide-total''' INT
+: This option is the same as '''-menu-slide-total''' except that it is
+: for submenu slideshows.
+: 
+; '''-slide-transition''' crossfade|fade [crossfade]
+: The type of fade transition between slides in a animated slide menu. Be
+: sure the menu length is long enough to support the 1 second transitions
+: between the slides. The length is determined by 1) the length of the
+: -bgaudio AUDIO 2) the length given with -menu-length NUM. For submenu
+: slideshows, it is determined by 1) '''-submenu-length''' NUM if given, and
+: by 2) the length of the audio from '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S).
+: 
+: See '''-menu-slide-total''' , '''-bgaudio''' , '''-menu-length''' ,
+: '''-submenu-length''', and '''-submenu-audio'''.
+: 
+: The 'crossfade' transition fades from one slide to another. The 'fade'
+: transition fades in and out from and to black. If you don't use this
+: option, the default is to use a 'crossfade' transition.
+: 
+; '''-slideshow-menu-thumbs''' FILES
+: Use the FILES instead of the 1st image in each slideshow as the
+: thumb that shows on the menu. This option is for multiple slideshows
+: or mixed slideshow/video menus only.
+: 
+; '''-slides-to-bin''' FILES
+: FILES will be resized to 640x480 using a 'box' filter - this
+: is called 'binning'. It will reduce the 'signal to noise' ratio for the
+: image in the animated slide menu. Use this if you get some unwanted
+: effects for certain images, such as pixels shifting in what should be a
+: static image. See also '''-slides-to-blur''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slides-to-blur''' FILES
+: FILES will be blurred a small amount - which will help on
+: slides that still have noise even after 'binning' with -slides-to-bin.
+: The default blur is 0x0.2 - you can increase this with
+: -slide-blur ARG. See also '''-slides-to-bin''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-blur''' VALUE or LIST of VALUES [0x0.2]
+: The argument to use for blurring files. It will be passed to
+: imagemagick: convert -blur ARG. The format of the arg is {radius}x{sigma}
+: and the default is 0x0.2. Using values between 0x0.1 and 0x0.9 is probably
+: the best range. Use a single value for all, or a list to have a different
+: blur for each file passed with '''-slides-to-blur'''. You must pass in
+: '''-files-to-blur''' FILES to use this option. Blurring can help 'noise'
+: problems in the video. See also '''-slides-to-bin''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-border''' WIDTH [100]
+: Pad the slides with a border for the animated slide menu. The default
+: without using an argument is 100. Using this option can also solve some
+: noise/ringing effects if used alone or in conjunction with 'binning'
+: ('''-slides-to-bin''') or blurring ('''-slides-to-blur''').
+: 
+; '''-slide-frame''' WIDTH [12]
+: Frame the slides for the animated slideshow menu. The default width
+: without using an argument is 12. See also '''-slide-frame-color'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-frame-color''', '''-slide-frame-colour'''
+: The color of the slide frame if passing '''-slide-frame'''. The default if
+: you don't use this option is a color-safe white: rgb(235,235,235).
+: 
+; '''-showcase-slideshow'''
+: If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+: the animated slideshow as a showcase video. It will be composed of slides
+: from each slideshow in the menu. The thumb for each slideshow button will
+: be static. If you used with a mixed menu of videos and slideshows, then
+: the video thumbs WILL be animated, so you may wish to use -static or
+: -textmenu with the option in that case. If you want to use the
+: **-switched-menus option with a mixed menu leave this option out.
+: 
+; '''-background-slideshow''', '''-bg-slideshow'''
+: If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+: the animated slideshow as a background video. See '''-showcase-slideshow'''
+: for additional details.
+: 
+; '''-no-confirm-backup'''
+: Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature. Todisc is
+: unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+: and backup your images, as you would with any beta software. Todisc
+: will prompt you to backup your files normally. If you have already backed
+: up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+: See '''General Options'''
+: 
+; '''-use-dvd-slideshow''' [FILE CONFIG]
+: If you pass this option without an argument, tovid will use the
+: dvd-slideshow program to create the animated slide menu, assuming you have
+: this program installed. The optional argument is the dvd-slideshow
+: configuration file - if you don't use this argument tovid will create it
+: for you. If you want to use the 'Ken Burns effect' - then the
+: configuration file argument is required. Note: the configuration file will
+: override many of the above options for slideshows.
+
+=== Burning the disc ===
+
+; '''-burn'''
+: Prompt to burn the DVD directory on completion.
+: 
+; '''-device'''
+: Device to use for the burning program [ /dev/dvdrw ]
+: 
+; '''-speed'''
+: The speed to use for burning the disc.
+
+=== Advanced usage ===
+
+==== Options ====
+
+; '''-menu-length'''
+: The desired animated main menu length in seconds
+; '''-submenu-length'''
+: The desired submenu length. This will also affect the length of submenu
+: audio for static submenus. (Assuming that -submenu-audio was passed in).
+: The default is to use 10 seconds of audio for static menus.
+; '''-submenu-stroke''' COLOR
+: The color for the sub-menu font shadow
+; '''-submenu-title-color''', '''-submenu-title-colour'''
+: The fill color used for sub-menu title fonts
+; '''-submenu-titles'''
+: You can supply a list of titles here for sub-menus without the length
+: restrictions found in thumb titles. Must equal number of videos
+; '''-chapters''' [ NUM | CHAPTER POINTS in HH:MM:SS ]
+: The number of chapters for each video (default: 6) OR
+: the actual chapter points in HH:MM:SS format.
+: Chapter points will be used for generating the submenu thumbs, and for
+: seeking with your DVD player. You can pass in just one value that will
+: be used for all videos, or supply a list of values (number of chapters)
+: or time code strings.
+: 
+: If you just pass an integer for 'number of chapters', then tovid will
+: make the chapter points for you by dividing the video length by the number
+: you supply. If using the '''-no-menu''' option, the INT passed in will be
+: the chapter interval in minutes, rather than the above formula.
+: 
+: If passing HH:MM:SS format you need to pass the string of chapter points for
+: each video and each string should have comma separated values.
+: Additionally, the first chapter should always start at 00:00:00 as
+: dvdauthor will add that if it is not there already.
+: 
+: To get your time codes, you can play your videos in mplayer and press 'o'
+: to see them on-screen. I have found these to be very accurate in my short
+: tests. For greater frame accuracy you could try loading the file in
+: avidemux and find the time codes for the frames you want.
+: 
+: If passing grouped chapters you need to join the chapters from all the
+: videos in a group with a '+' separator. If you want to skip creating
+: chapters for a video in the group use '0' for its chapters.
+: 
+: Note: chapters for grouped videos should probably be passed in using the
+: above HH:MM:SS format. (Arbitrary chapters using just an INT for the # of
+: chapters is not guaranteed to work reliably in all cases for grouped videos
+: at the moment.)
+: 
+: Example for passing just number of chapters ( 4 videos ):
+<pre>
+ -chapters 5 2 4 8
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: Example of passing chapter points ( 4 videos ):
+<pre>
+ -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45 \
+ 00:00:00,00:04:25.623,00:09:12,00:15:51 \
+ 00:00:00,00:05:10,00:13:41,00:18:13.033 \
+ 00:00:00,00:15:23.342,00:26:42.523
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: Example of passing grouped chapters using the '+' separator:
+<pre>
+ -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45+00:04:23,00:09:35 \
+ 00:00:00... etc.
+</pre>
+
+: 
+; '''-chapter-titles''' LIST
+: If you are using submenus, you can pass a list of titles for the
+: chapters. Each title must be quoted, and the number of titles given
+: must equal the total number of chapters for all videos. In other words
+: if you use -chapters 4 6 8 , you must give 18 chapter titles, in the same
+: order that the videos were passed in. Note: if you are passing in options
+: on the command line to the 'tovid disc' GUI, you must repeat the option
+: '''-chapter-titles''' for each video, accompanied by its respective chapter
+: titles. (you can also choose to use this syntax for the todisc script.)
+: 
+; '''-chapter-font''' FONT
+: Use FONT as the font for submenu chapters.
+: 
+; '''-chapter-fontsize''' SIZE
+: Use SIZE as the pointsize for the chapters font.
+; '''-chapter-color''' COLOR
+: The color for the chapters font.
+; '''-chapter-stroke''' COLOR
+: The color for the chapters font shadow
+: 
+; '''-seek''' NUM | "NUM1 NUM2 NUM3 . . ."
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails (default: 2.0 seconds)
+: If a quoted string of values matching the number of videos is used, then
+: each video can use a different seek value
+: If using switched menus, the '''-seek''' value(s) will be used to generate
+: the showcase image that displays on switching to another video choice with
+: the up/down arrow keys.
+; '''-fast-seek'''
+: Use faster seek method for ffmpeg. This is not as accurate as the default
+: method, and may produce grey frames.
+; '''-frame-safe''' Instead of seeking and then outputting one frame for
+: previews and static menus, output 9 frames and choose the largest. Not
+: frame accurate (may be as much as 9 frames off), but safer. Choose this
+: if you are getting grey frames/thumbnails with some videos. You can also
+: use it to try to get the 'best' frame. This option
+: has no effect on submenus at present.
+; '''-showcase-seek''' NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails for showcase video
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-bgvideo-seek''', '''-bg-video-seek''' NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating images for background video
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-bgaudio-seek''', **-bg-audio-seek NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating audio for bgaudio
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-group''' N VIDEO1 VIDEO2 . . .
+: Allow grouping videos in dvdauthor.xml, so they will play sequentially as
+: a group. The videos passed in after the 'N' will be grouped with the 'Nth'
+: video. Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+ -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: will group these 3 videos with the 2nd video given with '''-files''', so that
+: they will play sequentially as one title. Only one thumbnail and/or title
+: will appear on the menu for the group: it will be made from the 1st video
+: in the group. In the above example if you passed:
+<pre>
+ -files foo.mpg bar.mpg baz.mpg -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: then the group will consist of bar.mpg 2.mpg, 3.mpg and 4.mpg, and only the
+: title and/or thumbnail for bar.mpg will appear in the menu. You can use
+: '''-group''' more than once for multiple groups. Be sure to quote video
+: filenames if they contain spaces.
+
+=== Menu Style ===
+
+; '''-menu-title-geo''' north|south|east|west|center [south]
+: The position of the menu title. You may need to use -align as well if
+: you don't want your title covering other parts of your menu. See
+: '''-align'''
+; '''-menu-title-offset''' OFFSET (+X+Y)
+: Move menu title by this offset from its N|S|E|W|Center position. You
+: may need to use -align as well if you don't want your title covering other
+: parts of your menu. See '''-align'''
+; '''-button-style''' line|rect|text|text-rect [line]
+: The style of button that you will see when you play the DVD.
+: "line" style underlines the title, "rect" draws a rectangle around the
+: thumb when you select it in the DVD player, "text" highlights the video
+: title text, and "text-rect" draws a rectangle around the title
+: text.
+; '''-title-color''', '''-title-colour''' COLOR
+: Color to use for the main menu title. For list of supported colors do:
+: '''convert -list''' color. HTML notation may be used: "#ff0000". See:
+: [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php]
+; '''-title-stroke''' COLOR
+: Shadow color for the main menu's title font. Use "none" for transparent
+: outline (see title-color). Note: this is not a -stroke in the sense that
+: imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow (the font is drawn twice). To get
+: a true imagemagick stroke see '''-title-font-deco'''
+; '''-title-font-deco''', '''-title-fontdeco''' "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"
+: Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+: ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+: outlines, gradient fills, and many others. See '''Usage notes'''
+; '''-titles-stroke''' COLOR
+: Shadow color for the thumb or textmenu video titles font. Use "none" for
+: transparent outline (see '''-titles-color'''). Note: this is not a -stroke
+: in the sense that imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow
+: (the font is drawn twice). To get a true imagemagick stroke,
+: see '''-titles-font-deco'''
+; '''-titles-font-deco''', '''-titles-fontdeco''' "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"
+: Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+: ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+: outlines, gradient fills, and others. See '''Usage notes''' for more info.
+; '''-highlight-color''', '''-highlight-colour'''
+: Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to navigate.
+; '''-select-color''', '''-select-colour'''
+: Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to select.
+; '''-text-mist'''
+: Put a semi-transparent misted background behind the text for the menu's
+: title, just slightly larger than the text area.
+; '''-text-mist-color''', '''-text-mist-colour''' COLOR
+: Color of the mist behind the menu's title (see title-color).
+; '''-text-mist-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the mist behind the menu's title - see '''-opacity'''
+; '''-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the menu title text
+; '''-titles-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for video titles
+; '''-submenu-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for submenu menu titles
+; '''-chapter-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for submenu chapter titles
+; '''-menu-audio-fade'''
+: Number of sec to fade given menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds)
+: If you use '''-menu-audio-fade''' 0 then the audio will not be faded.
+; '''-submenu-audio-fade'''
+: Number of secs to fade sub-menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds).
+: See '''-menu-audio-fade'''
+; '''-intro''' VIDEO
+: Use a introductory video that will play before the main menu.
+: At present it must be a DVD compatible video at the correct resolution etc.
+: Only 4:3 aspect is supported: 16:9 will give unexpected results.
+
+==== Style options specific to showcase/textmenu arrangements ====
+
+; '''-text-start''' N
+: This option is for '''-textmenu''' menus. The titles will start at the Nth
+: pixel from the top of the menu ( Y axis ).
+; '''-title-gap''' N
+: This option is for '''-textmenu''' menus. The gap is the space between
+: titles vertically ( Y axis ).
+; '''-rotate''' DEGREES
+: Rotate the showcase image|video clockwise by DEGREES.
+: (default: if used without options, the rotate will be 5 degrees). Note:
+: this will not turn a portait image into a landscape image!
+; '''-showcase-geo''' GEOMETRY
+: The position of the showcase image. ( +X+Y position )
+: For example: '''-showcase-geo''' +300+200
+; '''-wave''' default|GEOMETRY
+: Wave effect for showcase image|video. Alters thumbs along a sine wave using
+: GEOMETRY. (default: no wave)
+: "default" will produce a wave arg of -20x556, which
+: produces a gentle wave with a small amount of distortion.
+: See: [http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave] if you want
+: to try other values.
+; '''-showcase-shape''' egg|oval|plectrum|arch|spiral|galaxy|flat-tube|normal
+: Apply a shaped transparency mask to showcase videos or images.
+: Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+: $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+: command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+: No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+; '''-showcase-framestyle''' none|glass
+: For -showcase-* style template only
+: "none" will use the default frame method, using "convert -frame . . ."
+: "glass" will use mplayer to make frames, which gives an interesting
+: animated effect to the frames, and can be much faster ( especially if you
+: don't use '''-rotate''' or '''-wave''' as thumbs will not need to be processed
+: again after mplayer spits them out. Note: you need to be using either
+: '''-showcase''' IMAGE or '''-showcase''' VIDEO for this "frame style" to work.
+; '''-showcase-frame-size''' PIXELS
+: The size of the showcase frame. This value will be used for both width and
+: height for the 'thickness' of the frame. This will also set the thickness
+: of the raised "frame" of the showcase thumb when you use '''-3d-showcase'''.
+: See also '''-thumb-frame-size''' and '''-showcase-frame-color'''
+; '''-showcase-frame-color''', '''-showcase-frame-colour''' PIXELS
+: The color of the showcase frame. Use hexadecimal or named colors notation.
+: Remember to quote! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+; '''-3d-showcase''', '''-3dshowcase'''
+: This will give an illusion of 3D to the showcase thumb: dynamic lighting on
+: rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs. Try it !
+
+=== Thumbnail Style ===
+
+; '''-user-thumbs''' IMAGE(S)
+: Supply your own images for menu buttons, rather than relying on todisc to
+: generate them from the video. They must be the same aspect ratio as the
+: videos in the titleset (4:3 or 16:9), as todisc will resize them without
+: checking and cropping. There must be on image for each thumb that will be
+: displayed on the menu (ie. one thumb for each video in a titleset).
+; '''-opacity''' [0-100] (default 100)
+: Opacity of thumbnail videos as a percentage (no percent sign).
+: Anything less than 100(%) is semi-transparent. Not recommended with dark
+: backgrounds.
+; '''-thumb-blur''', '''-blur''' NUM
+: The amount of feather blur to apply to the thumb-shape. The default is 1.0
+: which will more or less keep the shape and produces transparency at the
+: edges. Choose float or integer values between 0.1 and 2.0. 3D thumbs are
+: set to a tiny blur, so this option doesn't affect the '''-3dthumbs''' option.
+; '''-showcase-blur''' NUM
+: The amount of 'feather' blur to apply to the showcase image/video. Choose
+: values between 0.1 and 2.0. This option has no effect on '''-3d-showcase'''.
+: See '''-thumb-blur''' for more info.
+; '''-align''' DIRECTION
+: This will align thumbs/titles in DIRECTION, which is a compass direction
+: as used by imagemagick: ie. north|south|east|west|northeast|northwest etc.
+: If '''-align''' south then menu title will align north, unless you manually
+: set one or both of '''-menu-title-geo''' or '''-menu-title-offset'''.
+: Only '''-align''' north|south|center has any effect on showcase with thumb,
+: or with the default montage arrangement of central thumbs. The most
+: apparent changes with be with textmenu, though with 2 column arrangements
+: only the north* and south* changes will show an effect.
+: 
+: Diagram:
+; . northwest north northeast .
+; . .
+; . west center east .
+; . .
+; . southwest south souteast .
+; '''-thumb-mist''' [COLOR]
+: Use a mist behind thumbnails. The optional argument is the color of the
+: mist. This option helps with contrast. Be sure to set the font color
+: to an appropriate color if using a colored mist, and/or use a bold font.
+; '''-titles-color''', '''-titles-colour''' COLOR
+: Color to use for the thumb or textmenu titles. If your titles are not
+: clear enough or look washed out, try using a '''-titles-stroke''' that
+: is the same color as used with '''-titles-color''' (see '''-title-color''')
+; '''-showcase-titles-align''' west|east (default: center [centre])
+: The default is to center the text above the thumbnails. This option will
+: align the titles either to the left (west) or right (east). Aligning west
+: gives more space to the titles. Aligning east also does so, and as well
+: will facilitate using \n in your titles to achieve multi line titles.
+; '''-tile-3x1''', '''-tile3x1'''
+: Use a montage tile of 3x1 instead of the usual 2x2 for 3 videos
+: ie.
+: 
+: [movie1] [movie2] [movie3] instead of:
+: 
+: [movie1] [movie2]
+: 
+: [movie3]
+: 
+: This option only comes into play if the number of videos supplied equals 3
+: Otherwise it will be silently ignored. Not used for -showcase-* style.
+; '''-tile-4x1''', '''-tile4x1'''
+: Same as '''-tile-3x1''' above, except use tile of 4x1. (one row of 4 videos)
+; **-thumb-columns 3|4
+: Same as '''-tile-3x1''' and tile-4x1** above, except it accepts either '3'
+: (1 row of 3 thumbs), or '4' (one row of 4 thumbs) as an argument. This
+: alternative was added to help compact the gui layout.
+; '''-rotate-thumbs''' DEGREE LIST ( list of degrees, one for each thumb )
+: Rotate thumbs the given amount in degrees - can be positive or negative.
+: There must be one value for each file given with '''-files'''.
+: If the values are not the same distance from zero, the thumbs will be of
+: different sizes as images are necessarily resized *after* rotating. With
+: the default montage template - this will also resize the titles; with the
+: showcase template the titles will remain the same size. Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+ -rotate-thumbs -10 10 -10 10 -10 (for 5 files)
+</pre>
+
+: **Note: this option will not turn a portrait image into a landscape image!
+
+=== Dvdauthor options ===
+
+; '''-loop''' PAUSE
+: Pause in seconds at end of menu. Use "inf" if you wish indefinite pause.
+: Note: using "inf" with '''-menu-fade''' will disable the fadeout portion of
+: the fade. (default: "inf" for static menu, 10.0 seconds for animated.)
+; '''-playall'''
+: This option will create a button on the main menu that will allow going
+: right to the 1st title and playing all videos in succession before
+: returning to the main menu. If doing titlesets you can use this within
+: the '''-vmgm''' ... '''-end-vmgm''' options to allow playing ALL titlesets.
+: (If you want also to have a playall button in each titleset you could use
+: this option between each '''-titleset''' ... '''-end-titleset''' option or put
+: it outside of the vmgm and titlset options as a global option.
+; '''-videos-are-chapters'''
+: A button will be made on the main menu for each video, which you can use as
+: a chapter button. Selecting any video will play them all in order
+: starting with the selected one.
+; '''-chain-videos''' NUM | N1-NN
+: Without options this will chain all videos together so they play
+: sequentially without returning to the main menu, except for the last, which
+: will return. You can also specify which videos you want to behave this way
+: by number or by a range. ( ie. '''-chain-videos''' 1 2 4-6 ).
+; '''-subtitle-lang''' "lang1 lang2 . . ."
+: This allows selectable subtitles in the DVD, assuming you have optional
+: subtitles muxed into your videos. Use 2 character language codes.
+; '''-audio-channel''' "Video1_track Video2_track Video3_track . . ."
+: "VideoN_track" is the track number to use in a multi-track (multi-language)
+: mpeg: usually something like '''-audio-channel''' "1 0 1". The 1st track is
+: 0, 2nd is 1 . . . etc. If the tracks are 0. English 1.French, then the
+: above would make French the audio language on Video1 and Video3, and
+: English the audio language on Video2. You can check the mpeg with
+: "mplayer -v . . .".
+; '''-audio-lang''' LANGUAGE CODES
+: Identify the audio tracks on the DVD. These language codes are used for
+: each video in the titleset. When you use the audio button on your DVD
+: remote the language name is displayed. Example: '''-audio-lang''' en fr
+; '''-aspect''' 4:3|16:9
+: This will output a <video aspect WIDTH:HEIGHT /> tag for the dvdauthor
+: xml file. It will affect all videos in the titleset. Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+ -aspect 16:9
+</pre>
+
+; '''-widescreen''' nopanscan|noletterbox [nopanscan]
+: This will output a <video widescreen=nopanscan /> tag (for example)
+: for the dvdauthor xml file. It will affect all videos in the titleset. Use
+: in conjunction with '''-aspect''' if your dvd player is cropping your videos.
+: Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+ -aspect 16:9 -widescreen
+</pre>
+
+; '''-quick-nav'''
+: This option will allow navigation of a menu with more than one titleset by
+: using the left and right arrow keys of your DVD remote. When you press
+: this key the highlight will go the next or previous title. If you are at
+: the end of a titleset the right key will go to the next titleset. If you
+: are at the beginning of a titleset, the left key will go to the previous
+: titleset. If no next or previous titleset it will cycle to the end or
+: beginning of the titlesets.
+; '''-outlinewidth''', '''-outline-width''' WIDTH
+: For spumux outlinewidth variable. If there is a large gap between words in
+: a text button, this option may help.
+; '''-video-pause''' PAUSE (single value or list)
+: The pause in seconds after playing a video title. This is useful for
+: slideshows: the 'slide' will remain on the screen for this length of time.
+: If you have grouped videos you should probably not pause the videos that
+: have a grouped title after it, but instead see '''-grouped-video-pause'''.
+: Note: if you provide a list of values they must be one for each video.
+; '''-group-video-pause''' PAUSE (single value or list)
+: The pause in seconds after a grouped video plays. If you wish to pause
+: after the whole group finishes, then only use a value greater than zero
+: for the last video in the group. If providing a list of values they must
+: equal the number of grouped videos.
+
+=== Usage notes ===
+
+The argument given to various *-font options that set the font to use must be
+one of the fonts listed by the command 'convert -list type'. Please note that
+many of your installed fonts may not be available; if you want to maximize the
+number of fonts available to todisc, download and run
+[http://www.cit.gu.edu.au/~anthony/anthony.html Anthony Thyssen's]
+[http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/scripts/imagick_type_gen imagick_type_gen]
+script and run it like this:
+imagick_type_gen > ~/.magick/type.xml.
+If that doesn't work, try imagick_type_gen > ~/.magick/type.mgk.
+
+Or you can specify a ttf font file directly to the *-font options if you don't
+want to install fonts to ImageMagick.
+
+The *-stroke options in todisc are not a stroke in the sense that ImageMagick
+uses the term, but rather a font shadow (the text is drawn twice) To get a
+truer Imagemagick -stroke try something like:
+-title-font-deco "-stroke black" (or -titles-font-deco "-stroke black"). The
+'''-fontdeco''' option is quite flexible and takes a lot of ImageMagick's
+''convert'' options. Please refer to the tovid
+[http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Making_a_DVD_with_text_menus wiki] and Anthony
+Thyssen's guide [[http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage]] for further explanation and examples.
+
+== Command:mpg ==
+
+'''tovid mpg''' converts arbitrary video files into (S)VCD/DVD-compliant
+MPEG format, suitable for burning to CD/DVD-R for playback on a
+standalone DVD player.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid mpg''' [''OPTIONS''] '''-in''' ''INFILE'' '''-out''' ''OUTPREFIX''
+
+Where ''INFILE'' is any multimedia video file, and ''OUTPREFIX'' is what
+you want to call the output file, minus the file extension. ''OPTIONS''
+are additional customizations, described below.
+
+By default, you will (hopefully) end up with an NTSC DVD-compliant
+MPEG-2 video file; if you burn this file to a DVD-R, it should be
+playable on most DVD players.
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid mpg -in foo.avi -out foo_encoded</tt>
+: Convert 'foo.avi' to NTSC DVD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+: 
+; <tt>tovid mpg -pal -vcd foo.avi -out foo_encoded</tt>
+: Convert 'foo.avi' to PAL VCD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+
+=== Basic options ===
+
+; '''-v''', '''-version'''
+: Print tovid version number only, then exit.
+; '''-quiet'''
+: Reduce output to the console.
+; '''-fake'''
+: Do not actually encode; only print the commands (mplayer, mpeg2enc etc.)
+: that would be executed. Useful in debugging; have tovid give you the
+: commands, and run them manually.
+; '''-ffmpeg'''
+: Use ffmpeg for video encoding, instead of mplayer/mpeg2enc. Try this if
+: you have any problems with the default encoding method. Using this option,
+: encoding will be considerably faster. It can do almost everything that 
+: mpeg2enc does such as -filters and -subtitles by using a pipe from mplayer
+: though using these options will make encoding somewhat slower. The 
+: exceptions are some special options like -kvcd* -bdvd where you will still
+: need to use the default mpeg2enc option.
+
+==== Television standards ====
+
+; '''-ntsc'''
+: NTSC format video (USA, Americas) (default)
+; '''-ntscfilm'''
+: NTSC-film format video
+; '''-pal'''
+: PAL format video (Europe and others)
+
+==== Formats ====
+
+Standard formats, should be playable in most DVD players:
+
+; '''-dvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) DVD-compatible output (default)
+; '''-half-dvd'''
+: (352x480 NTSC, 352x576 PAL) Half-D1-compatible output
+; '''-svcd'''
+: (480x480 NTSC, 480x576 PAL) Super VideoCD-compatible output
+; '''-dvd-vcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VCD-on-DVD output
+; '''-vcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VideoCD-compatible output
+
+Non-standard formats, playable in some DVD players:
+
+; '''-kvcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing video CD
+; '''-kdvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+; '''-kvcdx3'''
+: (528x480 NTSC, 520x576 PAL) KVCDx3 specification
+; '''-kvcdx3a'''
+: (544x480 NTSC, 544x576 PAL) KVCDx3a specification (slightly wider)
+; '''-bdvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) BVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+
+See [http://kvcd.net/ kvcd.net] for details on the KVCD specification. Please
+note that KVCD ("K Video Compression Dynamics") is the name of a compression
+scheme that can be applied to any MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 video, and has little to
+do with VCD ("Video Compact Disc"), which is the name of a standard video disc
+format.
+
+=== Advanced options ===
+
+==== Aspect ratios ====
+
+tovid automatically determines aspect ratio of the input video by playing it in
+mplayer. If your video plays with correct aspect in mplayer, you should not
+need to override the default tovid behavior.
+
+If mplayer does not play your video with correct aspect, you may provide an
+explicit aspect ratio in one of several ways:
+
+; '''-full'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 4:3'''
+; '''-wide'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 16:9'''
+; '''-panavision'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 235:100'''
+; '''-aspect''' ''WIDTH''''':'''''HEIGHT''
+: Custom aspect, where ''WIDTH'' and ''HEIGHT'' are integers.
+
+The above are the intended INPUT aspect ratio. tovid chooses an optimal output
+aspect ratio for the selected disc format (VCD, DVD, etc.) and does the
+appropriate letterboxing or anamorphic scaling. Use '''-widetv''' to encode
+for a widescreen monitor or TV.
+
+==== Video stream options ====
+
+; '''-quality''' ''NUM'' (default 6)
+: Desired output quality, on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 giving the best
+: quality at the expense of a larger output file. Default is 6. Output size
+: can vary by approximately a factor of 4 (that is, '''-quality 1''' output
+: can be 1/4 the size of '''-quality 10''' output). Your results may vary.
+: WARNING: With '''-quality 10''', the output bitrate may be too high for
+: your hardware DVD player to handle. Stick with 9 or lower unless you
+: have phenomenally good eyesight.
+: 
+: At present, this option affects both output bitrate and quantization (but
+: may, in the future, affect other quality/size-related attributes). Use
+: '''-vbitrate''' if you want to explicitly provide a maximum bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-vbitrate''' ''NUM''
+: Maximum bitrate to use for video (in kbits/sec). Must be within allowable
+: limits for the given format. Overrides default values. Ignored for VCD,
+: which must be constant bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-interlaced'''
+: Do interlaced encoding of the input video (top fields first). Use this
+: option if your video is interlaced, and you want to preserve as much
+: picture quality as possible. This option is ignored for VCD, which
+: doesn't support it.
+: 
+: You can tell your source video is interlaced by playing it, and pausing
+: during a scene with horizontal motion; if you see a "comb" effect at the
+: edges of objects in the scene, you have interlaced video. Use this option
+: to encode it properly.
+: 
+: If you would prefer to have output in progressive format, use
+: '''-progressive'''. If you have a DV camera, use '''-interlaced_bf''' since
+: DV footage is generally bottom fields first.
+: 
+; '''-interlaced_bf'''
+: Do interlaced encoding of the input video (bottom fields first).
+: 
+; '''-deinterlace''', '''-progressive'''
+: Convert interlaced source video into progressive output video. Because
+: deinterlacing works by averaging fields together, some picture quality is
+: invariably lost. Uses an adaptive kernel deinterlacer (kerndeint), or,
+: if that's not available, the libavcodec deinterlacer (lavcdeint).
+: 
+; '''-mkvsub''' ''LANG'' (EXPERIMENTAL)
+: Attempt to encode an integrated subtitle stream (such as may be found in
+: Matroska .mkv files) in the given language code (eng, jpn, etc.) May work
+: for other formats.
+: 
+; '''-autosubs'''
+: Automatically include subtitle files with the same name as the input video.
+: 
+; '''-subtitles''' ''FILE''
+: Get subtitles from ''FILE'' and encode them into the video. WARNING: This
+: hard-codes the subtitles into the video, and you cannot turn them off while
+: viewing the video. By default, no subtitles are loaded. If your video is
+: already compliant with the chosen output format, it will be re-encoded to
+: include the subtitles. This works with both -ffmpeg and the default,
+: mpeg2enc.
+: 
+; '''-dvd-subtitles''', '''-dvdsubs''' | ''FILE''
+: Get subtitles from ''FILE(S)'' and add them '''as a subtitle stream''' into the
+: video. This allows selectable subtitles on your DVD. You can use more than
+: one file for multiple languages. Be sure to use the -subtitle-lang option
+: in 'tovid disc' so the name of the language will show up on the DVD instead
+: of 'UNKNOWN' or similar
+: 
+; '''-dvdsubs-only'''
+: Use this if you have an already complient MPEG and wish to add a subtitle
+: stream without re-encoding, using '''-dvdsubs''' ,
+: 
+; '''-dvdsubs-fontsize''' ''NUM'' [18]
+: The pointsize in pixels for DVD selectable subtitles. To affect this for
+: hard-coded subtitles ( '''-subtitles''' ) you will need to pass options to
+: the player via '''-mplayeropts''' or '''-mpvopts'''.
+: 
+; '''-type''' {live|animation|bw}
+: Optimize video encoding for different kinds of video. Use 'live' (default)
+: for live-action video, use 'animation' for cartoons or anime, and 'bw' for
+: black-and-white video. This option currently only has an effect with
+: KVCD/KSVCD output formats; other formats may support this in the future.
+: 
+; '''-safe''' ''PERCENT''
+: Fit the video within a safe area defined by ''PERCENT''. For example,
+: '''-safe 90%''' will scale the video to 90% of the width/height of the output
+: resolution, and pad the edges with a black border. Use this if some of the
+: picture is cut off when played on your TV. The percent sign is optional.
+: 
+; '''-filters''' {none,denoise,deblock,contrast,all} (default none)
+: Apply post-processing filters to enhance the video. If your input video is
+: very high quality, use 'none'. If your input video is grainy, use 'denoise';
+: if it looks washed out or faded, use 'contrast'. You can use multiple
+: filters separated by commas. To apply all filters, use 'all'. This works
+: with both mpeg2enc and -ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-fps''' ''RATIO''
+: Force input video to be interpreted as ''RATIO'' frames per second. May be
+: necessary for some ASF, MOV, or other videos. ''RATIO'' should be an
+: integer ratio such as "24000:1001" (23.976fps), "30000:1001" (29.97fps), or
+: "25:1" (25fps). This option is temporary, and may disappear in future
+: releases. (Hint: To convert a decimal like 23.976 to an integer ratio, just
+: multiply by 1000, i.e. 23976:1000)
+: 
+; '''-crop''' ''WIDTH'':''HEIGHT'':''X'':''Y''
+: Crop a portion of the video ''WIDTH'' by ''HEIGHT'' in size, with the
+: top-left corner at ''X'', ''Y''.
+: 
+; '''-widetv'''
+: Always encode to 16:9 widescreen (only supported by '''-dvd''', '''-kdvd''',
+: '''-bdvd'''), for optimal viewing on a widescreen monitor or TV.
+
+==== Audio stream options ====
+
+; '''-normalize'''
+: Analyze the audio stream and then normalize the volume of the audio.
+: This is useful if the audio is too quiet or too loud, or you want to
+: make volume consistent for a bunch of videos. Similar to running
+: normalize without any parameters. The default is -12dB average level
+: with 0dB gain.
+: 
+; '''-amplitude''' ''NUM''[dB]
+: In addition to analyzing and normalizing, apply the gain to the audio
+: such that the 'average' (RMS) sound level is ''NUM''. Valid values
+: range 0.0 - 1.0, with 0.0 being silent and 1.0 being full scale. Use
+: ''NUM''dB for a decibel gain below full scale (the default without
+: -amplitude is -12dB).
+: 
+; '''-abitrate''' ''NUM''
+: Encode audio at ''NUM'' kilobits per second. Reasonable values include
+: 128, 224, and 384. The default is 224 kbits/sec, good enough for most
+: encodings. The value must be within the allowable range for the chosen disc
+: format; Ignored for VCD, which must be 224.
+: 
+; '''-audiotrack''' ''NUM''
+: Encode the given audio track, if the input video has multiple audio tracks.
+: ''NUM'' is ''1'' for the first track, ''2'' for the second, etc. You may
+: also provide a list of tracks, separated by spaces or commas, for example
+: '''-audiotrack 3,1,2'''. Use '''tovid id''' on your source video to determine
+: which audio tracks it contains.
+: 
+; '''-downmix'''
+: Encode all audio tracks as stereo. This can save space on your DVD if
+: your player only does stereo. The default behavior of tovid is to use
+: the original number of channels in each track. For aac audio, downmixing
+: is not possible: tovid runs a quick 1 frame test to try to downmix the
+: input track with the largest number of channels, and if it fails then it
+: will revert to the default behavior of using the original channels.
+
+==== Other options ====
+
+; '''-config''' ''FILE''
+: Read configuration from ''FILE'', containing 'tovid' alone on the first
+: line, and free-formatted (whitespace-separated) tovid command-line options
+: on remaining lines.
+: 
+; '''-force'''
+: Force encoding of already-compliant video or audio streams.
+: 
+; '''-overwrite'''
+: Overwrite any existing output files (with the same name as the given
+: '''-out''' option).
+: 
+; '''-priority''' {low|medium|high}
+: Sets the main encoding process to the given priority. With high priority,
+: it may take other programs longer to load and respond. With lower priority,
+: other programs will be more responsive, but encoding may take 30-40%
+: longer. The default is high priority.
+: 
+; '''-discsize''' ''NUM''
+: When encoding, tovid automatically splits the output file into several
+: pieces if it exceeds the size of the target media. This option sets the
+: desired target DVD/CD-R size to ''NUM'' mebibytes (MiB, 2^20). By default,
+: splitting occurs at 700 for CD, 4300 for DVD. Use higher values at your
+: own risk. Use 650 or lower if you plan to burn to smaller-capacity CDs.
+: Doesn't work with the '''-ffmpeg''' option.
+: 
+; '''-fit''' ''NUM''
+: Fit the output file into ''NUM'' MiB. Rather than using default (or
+: specified) video bitrates, tovid will calculate the correct video bitrate
+: that will limit the final output size to ''NUM'' MiB. This is different
+: than '''-discsize''', which cuts the final file into ''NUM'' MiB pieces.
+: '''-fit''' makes sure that the file never exceeds ''NUM'' MiB. This works
+: with '''-ffmpeg''', but not with '''-vcd''' since VCDs have a standardized
+: constant bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-parallel'''
+: Perform ripping, encoding, and multiplexing processes in parallel using
+: named pipes. Maximizes CPU utilization and minimizes disk usage. Note that
+: this option simply does more tasks simultaneously, in order to make better
+: use of available CPU cycles; it's unrelated to multi-CPU processing (which
+: is done automatically anyway). Has no effect when '''-ffmpeg''' is used.
+: 
+; '''-update''' ''SECS''
+: Print status updates at intervals of ''SECS'' seconds. This affects how
+: regularly the progress-meter is updated. The default is once every five
+: seconds.
+: 
+; '''-mpv'''
+: Use mpv instead of mplayer. This option is experimental.
+: 
+; '''-mplayeropts''' ''OPTIONS''
+: Append ''OPTIONS'' to the mplayer command run during video encoding. Use
+: this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+: manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail, so use
+: this with caution!
+: 
+; '''-mpvopts''' ''OPTIONS''
+: Append ''OPTIONS'' to the mpv command run during video encoding. Use
+: this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+: or mpv manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail,
+: so use this with caution!
+: 
+; '''-nofifo''' (EXPERIMENTAL)
+: Do not use a FIFO pipe for video encoding. If you are getting "Broken pipe"
+: errors with normal encoding, try this option. WARNING: This uses lots of
+: disk space (about 2 GB per minute of video).
+: 
+; '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep the intermediate files after encoding. Usually, this means the audio
+: and video streams are kept (eg the .ac3 and .m2v files for an NTSC DVD).
+: This doesn't work with -parallel because the intermediate files are named
+: pipes, and not real files.
+: 
+; '''-slice''' ''START''-''END''
+: Encode a segment from ''START'' to ''END'' (in seconds). Only works with
+: -ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-from-gui'''
+: Put makempg into a fully non-interactive state, suitable for calling from
+: a gui.
+: 
+; '''-noask'''
+: Don't ask questions when choices need to be made. Assume reasonable
+: answers.
+
+== Command:id ==
+
+'''tovid id''' identifies each multimedia video file in a
+list, and reports its compliance with video disc standards such as VCD,
+SVCD, and DVD.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid id''' [''OPTIONS''] ''VIDEO_FILE(s)''
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid id foo.avi</tt>
+; <tt>tovid id -tabluar videos/*.mpg</tt>
+
+=== Options ===
+
+; '''-terse'''
+: Print raw video characteristics, no formatting. Helpful when
+: calling from other scripts.
+: 
+; '''-verbose'''
+: Print extra information from mplayer, tcprobe, and ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-accurate'''
+: Do lengthy play-time estimation by scanning through the entire video file.
+: Use this if the default behavior is giving you inaccurate play times.
+: 
+; '''-fast'''
+: Skip lengthy play-time estimation, and go with what mplayer reports
+: as being the video duration. Unlike pre-0.32 versions of tovid, this
+: is now the default behavior, and the '''-fast''' option doesn't do anything.
+: 
+; '''-tabular'''
+: Display output in a table format for easier comparison. Most useful
+: when identifying multiple video files.
+: 
+; '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep temporary directory for debugging.
+: 
+; '''-isformat''' [''pal-dvd''|''ntsc-dvd''] (same syntax for vcd and svcd)
+: Check ''VIDEO_FILE'' for compliance with the given disc format.
+: If ''VIDEO_FILE'' matches the given format, then '''tovid id''' reports "true"
+: and exits successfully. Otherwise, '''tovid id''' reports "false" and exits
+: with status 1 (failure). This checks and reports both vcd/svcd/dvd
+: and pal/ntsc.
+: 
+; '''-mpv'''
+: This option is mainly for testing. If you have only mpv installed instead
+: of mplayer, it is used automatically. With this option, you can have BOTH
+: installed and choose which one to use. (default: mplayer)
+
+=== Examples ===
+
+; <tt>tovid id -verbose homevideo.avi</tt>
+: Report everything mplayer, ffmpeg, and transcode can determine about
+: homevideo.avi.
+: 
+; <tt>tovid id -isformat dvd homevideo.mpg</tt>
+: Check to see if homevideo.mpg is compliant with the DVD standard.
+
+== Command:dvd ==
+
+'''tovid dvd''' takes a DVD directory as generated by tovid with 'tovid disc' or
+one of the GUI frontends like 'tovid gui' or 'tovid titlesets' and burns
+it to appropriate media. This will also work if the DVD directory is
+generated by the dvdauthor backend that tovid also uses.
+
+Running this program may slow down your other applications, due to intense
+disk activity.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid dvd''' [''OPTIONS''] ''DVD_DIR''
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid dvd /path/to/DVD/directory</tt>
+
+=== Options ===
+
+; '''-burn'''
+: Burn a DVD file-system in ''DVD_DIR'' (must contain a VIDEO_TS folder).
+: This option is currently not necessary as the makedvd script ONLY burns
+: now that legacy scripts like makexml have been removed. Left for
+: compatibility only.
+: 
+; '''-eject'''
+: Eject the DVD tray after burning is complete. By default, the DVD is not
+: ejected.
+: 
+; '''-device''' ''DEVICE'' (default /dev/dvdrw)
+: Burn the disc image to ''DEVICE'', the Linux device file-system
+: name of your DVD-recorder. Common examples might be /dev/dvdrw,
+: /dev/scd1, and /dev/hdc. You can also use a bus/id/lun triple
+: such as ATAPI:0,1,0
+: 
+; '''-speed''' ''NUM'' (default 1)
+: Burn disc at speed ''NUM''.
+: 
+; '''-label''' ''DISC_LABEL''
+: Uses ''DISC_LABEL'' as the volume ID. This appears as the mount
+: name of the disc on some computer platforms. Must be <=32
+: alphanumeric digits without spaces.
+: 
+; '''-quiet'''
+: Limit output to essential messages.
+: 
+; '''-noask'''
+: Don't ask interactive questions and assume answers that will continue
+: execution.
+
+ After burning, the DVD can be previewed by calling:
+ '''''xine''' dvd:/path/to/output/directory''
+ or:
+ '''''vlc''' /path/to/output/directory''
+
+== Command:chapters ==
+
+'''tovid chapters''' will start a GUI using mplayer to set chapter points in a
+video. If the video plays through and you want to add more chapters you can
+press the play button again, but remember that new chapter points will be
+appended (in correct sequential order). It will display the resulting chapter
+points, and also output to a terminal (useful for scripts). As well it will
+give the option of saving the chapters string to a text file.
+
+Note that the 'tovid gui' now features a similar widget when you press the
+chapters button on the opening page.
+
+=== Examples ===
+
+; <tt>tovid chapters foo.avi</tt>
+: 
+; <tt>chapters=$(tovid chapters /home/grepper/videos/foo.avi)</tt>
+
+== CONTACT ==
+
+For further assistance, contact information, forum and IRC links,
+please refer to the [http://tovid.wikia.com/ tovid homepage].
+
+
+

 
@@ -0,0 +1,1663 @@
+'''tovid manual'''
+
+
+
+
+----
+
+__TOC__
+
+----
+
+
+== Name ==
+
+tovid: Make DVDs from video files
+
+== Description ==
+
+'''tovid''' is a command-line tool for creating DVDs. It can encode your video
+files to DVD-compliant MPEG format, generate simple or complex DVD menus,
+author and burn a ready-to-watch DVD, with just a few shell commands. A
+graphical interface is also provided to make the process even easier.
+
+'''NOTE''': As of tovid 0.35, the legacy scripts '''makemenu''' and '''makexml'''
+have been removed and no longer appear in this manpage.
+All of their functions and more can be done with the 'tovid disc' command,
+(todisc script). See '''Command:disc''' and the [http://tovid.wikia.com wiki]
+for more info.
+
+Also note that as of tovid 0.32, this is the only manual page provided by tovid.
+There is now a single executable frontend to all functionality in the suite, so
+if you were expecting to find manpages for '''todisc''', '''idvid''', '''makempg'''
+and their kin, they can all be found in the '''tovid''' manpage you are reading now.
+And yes, this makes for a pretty large manual page. If you are viewing this
+manpage from the command-line '''man''' utility, which normally pages through the
+'''less''' utility, you can skip to a section by searching with the '''/''' key,
+followed by a '''^''' to match the given section name. For example, to skip to
+the '''mpg''' command, type '''/^Command:mpg'''. See '''man less''' for more on how
+to navigate.
+
+== Usage ==
+
+'''tovid''' ''COMMAND'' [''OPTIONS'']
+
+Where ''COMMAND'' is one of the following:
+
+    Main Commands
+
+; '''disc'''
+: Encode, make menus, author, burn. (was '''todisc'''. See '''Command:disc''')
+; '''gui'''
+: Start the tovid GUI (was '''todiscgui'''. See '''Command:gui''')
+; '''titlesets'''
+: A GUI wizard for multiple titlesets. (new: See '''Command:titlesets''')
+
+    Helper Commands
+
+; '''mpg'''
+: Encode videos to MPEG format (was '''tovid'''. See '''Command:mpg''')
+; '''dvd'''
+: Author and/or burn a DVD (was '''makedvd'''. See '''Command:dvd''')
+; '''id'''
+: Identify one or more video files (was '''idvid'''. See '''Command:id''')
+; '''chapters'''
+: A GUI using mplayer for setting chapter points.  It will return a string of
+: chapter points to the terminal, in a format recognized by 'tovid disc'
+: (todisc) or by 'tovid gui', for the  '''-chapters''' option.
+
+The ''OPTIONS'' differ for each command; run '''tovid <command>''' with no
+further arguments to get help on a command, and what options it expects.
+
+== Configuration ==
+
+Two configuration files are created the first time you run tovid:
+
+; '''~/.tovid/preferences'''
+: Defines working directory for all scripts.
+: You can define the output directory for makempg here.
+: The 'ffmpeg' executable can be set here: ffmpeg or avconv (TOVID_FFMPEG)
+; '''~/.tovid/tovid.ini'''
+: Includes command-line options that should be passed to the various
+: '''tovid''' sub-commands.  Note: each sub-command has its own section,
+: starting with the line [sub-command], for example:
+<pre>
+    [disc]
+    ; -no-warn
+    -static
+    -no-ask
+</pre>
+
+
+Edit these files if you wish to change your configuration.
+
+The following environment variables are also honoured:
+
+<pre>
+    TOVID_HOME (directory containing preferences: ~/.tovid)
+    TOVID_WORKING_DIR (working directory for all scripts).
+    TOVID_OUTPUT_DIR (output directory for the makempg script).
+    TOVID_FFMPEG_CMD (the 'ffmpeg' executable to use: ffmpeg or avconv)
+</pre>
+
+These will override 'TOVID_HOME', 'WORKING_DIR', 'OUTPUT_DIR',
+and 'TOVID_FFMPEG' if set in ~/.tovid/preferences.
+
+== Command:gui ==
+
+== Usage ==
+
+'''tovid gui''' [''OPTIONS'']
+
+'''tovid gui''' starts the graphical user interface (GUI) for tovid. This is
+the easiest way to start creating DVDs with tovid. The optional arguments
+''OPTIONS'' are any option used by todisc ('tovid disc') which will save
+entering it manually, OR the full path to a saved script from the GUI.
+You can also combine these, but the script must be the FIRST option
+directly after '''tovid gui''' .  (This option to save the contents of your
+project allows you to use it as a bash script later, or to reload the
+project to continue working with it at another time.)
+
+'''tovid gui''' will also take the option '''--position''', which denotes the
+screen position that the GUI will start at, in the form '+X+Y', similar to
+this part of the Xorg -geometry string.
+
+All help is integrated in the form of tooltips.  You can also see
+**Command:disc ** for more detail about the options.  Note: if you wish to use
+a GUI to make multiple titlesets on the same DVD use '''*tovid titlesets*''',
+which is a wizard that uses the the 'tovid gui. See '''*Command:titlesets*'''.
+
+Please note that although the interface may seem complex with so many options,
+you can create a fully functional DVD with only a few options on the opening
+tab of the GUI (select video files and an output name).
+
+== Command:titlesets ==
+
+'''tovid titlesets''' will assist in making a DVD with multiple titlesets.  It can
+be started without any options, or you can feed it the path to a saved titleset
+script as an option.  The option to save a script is also useful as the resulting
+script can be run later from a terminal.
+
+== Command:disc ==
+
+'''tovid disc''' creates a DVD file-system with optional menus, from a list of
+multimedia video files and their titles.  As todisc can function as a master
+script, calling other scripts as it needs them, it is the easiest command line
+program for creating a DVD from start to finish, including automatically
+converting non-compliant videos and prompting to burn at completion.  It can do
+animated menus, static thumbnail menus, text-only menus, or author with no menu.
+In addition, it can do slideshows, using images as input, and even combine
+slideshows with videos.  It supports sub-menus for chapter breaks,
+configurable menu style, animated backgrounds and transparency effects.
+From simple (no menu) to complex (switched menus and titlesets), you should
+be able to do what you want with 'tovid disc'.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+<pre>
+ tovid disc [OPTIONS] \
+    -files <file list> -titles <title list>
+    -out mydvd
+</pre>
+
+For example:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -files File1.mpg File2.mpg File3.mpg \
+      -titles "Episode 1" "Episode 2" "Episode 3" \
+      -out Season_one
+</pre>
+
+The number of '''-files''' and '''-titles''' must be equal, though if you do not
+include any titles '''tovid disc''' will use the basename of the included files
+as titles.  If you are doing a slideshow or multiple slideshows, use
+'''-slides''' rather than '''-files''' for passing in the images.  You may use
+-files and -slides more than once to create an ordering in a mixed
+slideshows/videos menu.  See Slideshows part of Usage section, below.
+
+If the input files are not mpeg, you will have the option to auto-encode them.
+
+General Options
+
+'''At present there are 2 display arrangements or "templates":'''
+
+; A. (Default)
+: Thumbs will be centred, and as large as space restraints allow.
+: 
+; B. '''-showcase''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: Produces an arrangement with small buttons on
+: the side and the showcase image/video in the centre.  If no IMAGE or VIDEO
+: argument is supplied, the central thumb will be omitted.
+: 
+: Note: '''-textmenu''', '''-quick-menu''' and '''-switched-menus''' are all types
+: of showcase style menus.  See descriptions under '''Menu style''' section.
+
+The '''-titles''' arguments should be double or single quoted, or have the spaces
+backslash-escaped. Special characters (like ", !, *, &, ?) may need to be
+backslash-escaped.  To include a quoted string within a title, backslash-escape
+the quotes.  These titles are used for labelling thumbnails on the main menu,
+and for the submenu title for that video.  ( see also '''-submenu-titles''' )
+
+The '''-showcase''' styles can use longer titles than the default arrangement.
+With a showcase style, use: '''-showcase-titles-align west''' to give more space
+for the title, or use '''-showcase-titles-align east''' to allow titles of more
+than one line.
+
+The default style can only show about 16 characters (depending on the number
+of thumbs, and what '''-titles-font''' and '''-titles-fontsize''' is being used).
+If your titles are too long to fit in the label area, you may try using
+sub-menus, which can display longer titles, for example:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -submenus \
+      -files file1.mpg file2.mpg ... \
+      -titles "Short 1" "Short 2" \
+      -submenus \
+      -submenu-titles "Long Title One" "Long Title Two" \
+      -out foo
+
+</pre>
+
+The '''-align''' argument will position both titles and thumbs either south,
+north east, west, southwest, northwest, southeast, northeast, subject to
+certain constraints of each arrangement. For example a showcase style with
+a showcase thumb can only do north|south|center.
+
+More Examples:
+
+A text-only menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -textmenu ...
+</pre>
+
+No menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid -nomenu -files file1.mpg file2.mp4 "file 3.avi" -out mydvd
+</pre>
+
+'''Titlesets'''
+
+A word should be mentioned here about titlesets, which is really just a
+hierarchy of menus.  You need to use titlesets, for example, if you have videos
+of different resolutions, or otherwise want to arrange videos on separate menus.
+If you want to have titlesets you need to put all the options for each titleset
+menu you would like to have between '''-titleset''' and '''-end-titleset''' options.
+
+Additionally, for the main menu (the opening menu that will let you jump to
+each titleset), you need to put options between '''-vmgm''' and '''-end-vmgm'''.
+You do not use '''-files''' for the opening menu options ('''-vmgm'''), but you
+will need as many TITLES after '''-titles''' as you have menus.
+
+Any options outside the '''-titleset''' '''-end-titleset''' and '''-vmgm'''
+'''-end-vmgm''' areas will be global options applying to every titleset.
+If a global option is duplicated inside a '''-titleset''' or '''-vmgm''' area, the
+global option will be overridden.
+
+Note: you do not need titlesets for a single menu with chapter break menus, for
+that just use '''-submenus''' or '''-ani-submenus'''
+
+Example of using '''tovid disc''' with titlesets:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -static -out MY_DVD \
+   \
+   -titleset \
+   -files 1.mpg 2.mpg 3.mpg \
+   -titles "Title One" "Title Two" "Title Three" \
+   -end-titleset \
+   \
+   -titleset \
+   -files 4.mpg 5.mpg \
+   -titles "Title Four" "Title Five" \
+   -background foo.jpg \
+   -showcase bar.png \
+   -end-titleset \
+   \
+   -vmgm \
+   -titles "Season One" "Season Two" \
+   -background bg.jpg \
+   -bgaudio foo.mp3 \
+   -titles-fontsize 20 \
+   -end-vmgm
+</pre>
+
+See also '''-titleset''' and '''-vmgm'''
+
+'''Slideshows'''
+
+You can also use '''tovid disc''' to make slideshows.  This can either be a single
+slideshow, or multiple slideshows on the same menu.
+Remember to use '''-slides''' rather than '''-files''' for passing in the
+images.  Images can be any filetype that imagemagick supports: for example
+JPEG, PNG, GIF, TGA BMP etc.  For a single slideshow do not use '''-titles''':
+use -menu-title to set the slideshow title.
+
+For a single slideshow the default is an animated menu that transitions from
+slide to slide.  The default transition type is 'crossfade', which fades each
+slide into the next and loops back to the first slide at the end.  If instead
+you use '''-static''', then a static 'polaroid stack' menu of all the slides is
+created, with a single spumux'ed button for navigating with the enter key.  You
+may have to experiment to find out which DVD remote button advances the slides.
+Try the 'next chapter'(skip ?) button and the play or enter buttons.
+If you want to limit the number of slides in the menu to a subset of all files
+entered with '''-slides''', then use '''-menu-slide-total''' INT.  Be sure to use
+a long enough audio file for '''-bgaudio''' or set '''-menu-length''' so the menu
+is long enough to support the slides plus transitions.
+
+You can also put multiple slideshows on one menu.  To do this, use
+'''-slides IMAGES''' for each slideshow desired.  You can even mix videos
+with slideshows by using '''-files''' '''-slides''' '''-titles''' multiple times.
+
+Example of a single slideshow with an animated menu with transitions:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" -slides images/*.jpg \
+    -menu-slide-total 20 -slide-transition crossfade -bgaudio slideshow.wav \
+    -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+Example of multiple slideshows on one menu:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+   -slides photos/september/*.jpg \
+   -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+   -slides photos/november/*.jpg \
+   -tile3x1 -rotate -5 5 -5 -align center \
+   -bgaudio background.wav \
+   -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+Example of mixed videos and slideshows:
+
+<pre>
+ $ tovid disc -menu-title "Autumn in Toronto" \
+   -files fall_fair.mov \
+   -slides  photos/september/*.jpg \
+   -files harvest.mpg \
+   -slides photos/october/*.jpg \
+   -titles "Fall Fair" "September" "Harvest" "October" \
+   -background autumn.png \
+   -bgaudio bg.mp3 \
+   -out myslideshow
+</pre>
+
+See the other slideshow options in the Slideshows options section.
+
+'''Encoding Options'''
+
+These are options for reencoding your non-compliant videos.  They are passed
+directly to the '''tovid mpg''' command which is invoked by '''tovid disc''' when
+non-compliant files are found.  For details, see the '''Command:mpg''' section.
+Here is a list of possible options you can pass:
+    '''-config''', '''-ntscfilm''', '''-dvd-vcd''', '''-half-dvd''', '''-kvcd''',
+    '''-kvcdx3''', '''-kvcdx3a''', '''-kdvd''', '''-bdvd''', '''-704''', '''-normalize''',
+    '''-amplitude''', '''-overwrite''', '''-panavision''', '''-force''', '''-fps''',
+    '''-vbitrate''', '''-quality''', '''-safe''', '''-crop''', '''-filters''',
+    '''-abitrate''', '''-priority''', '''-deinterlace''', '''-progressive''',
+    '''-interlaced''', '''-interlaced_bf''', '''-type''', '''-fit''', '''-discsize''',
+    '''-parallel''', '''-mkvsub''', '''-autosubs''', '''-subtitles''', '''-update''',
+    '''-mplayeropts''', '''-audiotrack''', '''-downmix''', '''-ffmpeg''', '''-nofifo''',
+    '''-from-gui''', '''-slice''', '''-quiet''',
+    '''-fake''', '''-keepfiles'''
+
+=== General Options ===
+
+; '''-keep-files''', '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep all intermediate/temporary files (helps with debugging)
+; '''-no-ask''' | '''-noask'''
+: Skip all interactive questions.  No preview, automatic re-encoding with
+: tovid if needed, no interactive option to use background video for bgaudio.
+; '''-no-warn''', '''-nowarn'''
+: Don't pause after outputting warning or info messages
+; '''-jobs'''
+: By default, '''tovid disc''' starts a parallel job for each processor
+: detected.  With this option you can manually set the number of jobs.  For
+: example if you have a computer with 2 CPUs you can set "-jobs 1" to keep
+: one processor free for other things.  At present this applies to the time
+: consuming imagemagick loops: you will notice a substantial speedup now if
+: you have a multi-cpu system.
+; '''-grid'''
+: Show a second preview image with a grid and numbers that will help in finding
+: coordinates for options that might use them, like '''-text-start'''
+; '''-no-confirm-backup'''
+: This option is for when your DVD contains images for a slideshow.
+: Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature.  Todisc is
+: unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+: and backup your images, as you would with any beta software.  Todisc
+: will prompt you to backup your files normally.  If you have already backed
+: up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+: 
+: ==Options==
+: 
+; '''-ntsc'''
+: 720x480 output, compatible with NTSC standard (default)
+; '''-pal'''
+: 720x576 output, compatible with PAL standard
+; '''-submenus'''
+: Create a sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: no sub-menus)
+; '''-ani-submenus'''
+: Create an animated sub-menu with chapters for each video (default: not
+: animated)
+; '''-no-menu | -nomenu'''
+: With this option todisc will just create a DVD file system, ready for
+: burning, with NO MENU, just the supplied video files.  These do not need
+: to be compliant, as non-compliant files will be encoded as usual.  The
+: '''-out''' option is not required.  Each  video will be a chapter unless
+: '''-chapters''' OPTION is passed.  The  '''-chapters''' option is a number
+: indicating the chapter interval in minutes, or a HH:MM:SS string
+: indicating chapter points.  See '''-chapters'''
+; '''-encode-only'''
+: This option was originally meant for the GUI, to allow it to be used for
+: just encoding rather than making a DVD structure.  But it works well from
+: the command line as well as it has the added advantage that you can input
+: a list of files.  Remember any makempg ('tovid mpg') options you use will
+: be passed on to the makempg script when encoding.
+
+=== Menu style ===
+
+; '''-showcase''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: If used without an argument, use showcase style without a central thumb.
+: This is a different arrangement of images for the menu: small thumbnails
+: go at left (and right) side of screen, with a larger image in the centre.
+: Maximum of 10 videos.  If the provided argument is a video file, the
+: central thumb will be animated (regardless of whether '''-static''' is part
+: of the command line). Only 4:3 or 16:9 videos and images are accepted for
+: for the showcase file: if not one of these todisc will assume it is the
+: aspect ratio as the videos in the titleset.
+; '''-textmenu''', '''-text-menu''' NUM
+: If used without an argument, create a textmenu out of the supplied titles
+: The optional argument specifies how many titles are in the 1st column,
+: i.e. giving 4 titles and using "-textmenu 2" would make 2 columns of 2
+: titles. The default is to put all titles up to 13 in the first column
+: before starting a second column.  Maximum: 2 columns and 26 titles.
+: Note that column 2 titles are justified to the left unless you add
+: '''-edge-justify''' to the command line. The menu will be static if no video
+: files are supplied with either '''-background''' or '''-showcase''' options.
+; '''-quick-menu'''
+: If you are using ffmpeg 0.8 or newer you can use this option.  This will
+: make a very quick  menu by using ffmpeg instead of imagemagick.
+: There are two choices: you can either use '-showcase IMAGE|VIDEO' or
+: '-background VIDEO'.  There are no fancy effects like '''-wave'''
+: or '''-rotate''' available for it, but it is extremely fast.  It will be a
+: text-menu style of menu, with no video thumbs, and a central showcase
+: IMAGE(static) | VIDEO(animated).
+: (i) see '''-bg-color''' if you are not using a '''-background''' and want to
+: change the default.  (default is dark blue for -quick-menu arrangements). )
+: (ii) Note: todisc will still work with 'vhooks' if you have an old ffmpeg
+: with vhooks compiled in.
+: 
+: Specifying the IMAGE|VIDEO argument to '''-showcase''' is mandatory for this
+: style of menu, unless used in conjunction with '''-switched-menus'''
+: in which case the videos passed with '''-files''' automatically become the
+: showcase videos.  If '''-quick-menu''' is used in combination with
+: '''-switched-menus''' it really speeds up an otherwise time consuming process.
+: 
+: Example:
+<pre>
+    -quick-menu -showcase /home/grepper/showcase.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: See '''-switched-menus''' for example of making switched menus with
+: '''-quick-menu'''
+: 
+; '''-bg-color''', '''-bg-colour'''
+: The color to use for the menu background. (default: ntsc-safe black)
+: Note: use a color a great deal darker than you want, as it appears quite
+: a bit lighter in the video version.  You can use hexadecimal ('#ffac5f')
+: notation or named colors ('Lime').  convert -list color will show them.
+: See [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php colors] for more details.
+; '''-submenu-bg-color''', '''-submenu-bg-colour'''
+: The color to use as background for the  submenu(s).
+: (default: ntsc-safe black)  See '''-bg-color'''
+; '''-static'''
+: Main menu will consist of static thumbnail links. (default: animated)
+: If you use a video for -showcase or -background then it will still be
+: a 'moving' menu, in spite of the static buttons.  This option also does
+: double duty for the '''-switched-menus''' option, and will create static
+: "switched" images.
+: See also '''-switched-menus'''
+; '''-background''' IMAGE|VIDEO
+: Menu background.  This can be a image file or an video file.  If it is a
+: video file the background will be animated.  Pick a file of correct aspect
+: ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to 4:3 aspect ratio.
+: It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+; '''-submenu-background''' IMAGE
+: Submenu background.  This can be only be an image file.  Pick a file of
+: correct aspect ratio: i.e. it should still look good when resized to
+: 4:3 aspect ratio.  It will be resized to fill the entire background.
+; '''-menu-title'''
+: Title for the root menu - may be longer than thumbnail labels
+: Also if you use \n in the title, you can use multi line titles, but you
+: would need to adjust '''-title-fontsize''' to something smaller than default
+: for example:
+: 
+<pre>
+    $ tovid disc ... -menu-title "A\nMultilined\nTitle" -title-fontsize 24
+</pre>
+
+; '''-title-font''', '''-menu-font''' FONT
+: Font to use for titles, either by ImageMagick font name (ex., "Arial") or
+: explicit pathname (ex., "/full/path/to/arial.ttf"). To see a complete
+: list of acceptable ImageMagick font names, run '''convert -list type''', and
+: refer to the leftmost column
+; '''-title-fontsize''', '''-menu-fontsize'''
+: Font size for main menu - best to -preview if you use this
+; '''-submenu-font'''
+: Font to use for the sub-menu main titles.  See '''-title-font'''
+; '''-submenu-fontsize'''
+: Font size for the sub-menu main titles
+; '''-menu-fade''' ['BACKGROUND DURATION']
+: Fade the menu in and out The background will fade in first, then title (and
+: mist if called for), then the menu thumbs.  The fadeout is in reverse
+: order.  'BACKGROUND DURATION' is an integer denoting the amount of time
+: the background will play before the menu begins to fade in.  This can allow
+: you to do a 'transition' to the menu: if you supply a -background VIDEO it
+: will play for the indicated time before the menu fades in.  Leave the
+: optional argument empty (just '''-menu-fade''') to get the default behavior
+: of showing the background for 1 second before fading the menu in.  To
+: disable the fadeout portion, use ''''-loop''' inf'.  See also:
+: '''-transition-to-menu''' and '''-loop'''
+; '''-transition-to-menu'''
+: This option goes with the '''-menu-fade''' option above, which must be
+: enabled for it to have effect.  It is a convenience option for animated
+: backgrounds: the background will become static at the exact point the
+: thumbs finish fading in. This menu does not loop unless you pass
+: '''-loop''' VALUE.  See also: '''-loop'''
+; '''-bgaudio''', '''-bg-audio*''' FILE
+: An file containing audio for the main menu background.  For static menus
+: the default is to use 20 seconds of audio.  You can change this using the
+: '''-menu-length''' option.
+; '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S)
+: List of files for sub-menu audio backgrounds. If one file is given, then
+: it will be used for all sub-menus.  Otherwise the number given must equal
+: the number of submenus, though the keyword "none" in this list may be used for
+: silence.  See also '''-submenu-length'''
+; '''-titleset''' . . . '''-end-titleset'''
+: If you have more than one titleset, put options for each titleset between
+: '''-titleset''' and '''-end-titleset'''.  A separate menu will be created that
+: can be accessed from the main menu (VMGM).  You can create this main menu
+: using the '''-vmgm''' '''-end-vmgm''' options.  See '''-vmgm''' below and
+: TITLESET paragraph opening '''Usage''' section.
+; '''-vmgm''' . . . '''-end-vmgm'''
+: The VMGM menu is the root menu when you use titlesets.
+: Put your VMGM menu options between '''-vmgm''' and '''-end-vmgm'''.
+: You only need '''-titles''' "Titleset One title"  "Titleset Two title"
+: . . . , and not '''-files'''.
+: Any other options can be used, but the  menu will be a textmenu style by
+: default.  '''Hint''': use '''-showcase''' IMAGE/VIDEO to create a fancier
+: VMGM menu.
+; '''-no-vmgm-menu''', '''-no-vmgm'''
+: This will skip the creation of a VMGM ( root menu ) for titlesets. The DVD
+: will start with the first titleset.  You can not use this option unless also
+: using '''-quick-nav''' as you would not have a way to get to other titlesets.
+; '''-skip-vmgm'''
+: Start DVD from the first titleset instead of the VMGM ( root ) menu.
+; '''-switched-menus''', '''-switched-menu'''
+: This will make a "switched menu": there will be a central image where the
+: showcase image would go, and text menu titles along the menu edge where
+: textmenu titles go.  As you select a video title with the down or up arrow
+: on your DVD remote, the image in the centre will change to the image or
+: video made from that selected video. Do not use '''-showcase''' IMAGE/VIDEO
+: with this option.
+: 
+: This can be a time consuming process for making animated menus as you need
+: to make a separate menu for each video provided with '''-files'''.  The
+: process can be greatly sped up by using '''-quick-menu''' in conjunction with
+: this, though you will lose fancy options like '''-rotate''' and '''-wave'''.
+: 
+: Note that if you want to just have a static rather than an 'animated'
+: image, add '''-static''' to the command line.
+: 
+: Example for using with '''-quick-menu''':
+<pre>
+    -switched-menus -quick-menu
+</pre>
+
+
+=== Thumbnail style ===
+
+; '''-titles-font''' FONT
+: Display thumbnail or textmenu titles in the given font
+; '''-titles-fontsize''' POINTS
+: Font size to use for thumbnail or textmenu titles
+; '''-thumb-shape'''
+: normal|oval|vignette|plectrum|arch|spiral|blob|star|flare
+: Apply a shaped transparency mask to thumbnail videos.
+: These "feathered" shapes look best against a plain background (or used
+: in conjunction with '''-thumb-mist''' [COLOR]).  For this rectangular
+: semi-transparent misted background for each thumb:  see '''-thumb-mist'''.
+: Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+: $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+: command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+: (i.e ~/.tovid/masks/tux.png becomes -thumb-shape tux)
+: No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+; '''-thumb-frame-size''' INT
+: The size (thickness) of the thumb frames in pixels.  This will also set the
+: thickness of the raised "frame" of thumbs when you use '''-3d-thumbs'''.
+: See also '''-showcase-frame-size''' and '''-thumb-frame-color'''
+; '''-thumb-frame-color''', '''-thumb-frame-colour''' COLOR
+: The color of frames for video thumbnails.  Use hexadecimal or named colors
+: notation.  Remember to quote if using hexadecimal! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+; '''-3d-thumbs''', '''-3dthumbs'''
+: This will give an illusion of 3D to the thumbnails: dynamic lighting on
+: rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs.  Try it !
+
+=== Slideshows ===
+
+; '''-slides''' IMAGES
+: Use '''-slides''' IMAGES to pass in images for a slideshow.  The default is
+: to make an animated menu of the slides, moving from one slide to the
+: next. If you use '''-static''', a 'polaroid stack' montage is created.  This
+: composites the slides onto the background in 'random' locations with random
+: rotations.  '''-slides'''  IMAGES can be used multiple times if you wish to
+: make a menu with multiple slideshows.  You can also make a menu
+: of mixed videos and slideshows by using '''-slides''' IMAGES, and '''-files'''
+: VIDEOS multiple times.  For such a menu, the number of '''-titles'''
+: needs to match the number of '''-files''' passed in plus the number of
+: slideshows.  (Each time you use '''-slides''' counts as one title.)  To use
+: a transition between the slides, use '''-slide-transition'''
+: crossfade|fade.  See '''-slide-transition''' '''-menu-slide-total'''
+: 
+; '''-menu-slide-total''' INT
+: Use INT number of the slides that were passed in with '''-slides'''
+: to make the animated or static slide menu.  The length of the menu is
+: determined by 1) '''-menu-length''' NUM if given,  and by 2) the length
+: of the audio from '''-bgaudio'''.  For submenu slideshows, it is determined
+: by 1) '''-submenu-length''' NUM if given,  and by 2) the length of the
+: audio from '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S).
+: 
+; '''-submenu-slide-total''' INT
+: This option is the same as '''-menu-slide-total''' except that it is
+: for submenu slideshows.
+: 
+; '''-slide-transition''' crossfade|fade [crossfade]
+: The type of fade transition between slides in a animated slide menu.  Be
+: sure the menu length is long enough to support the 1 second transitions
+: between the slides.  The length is determined by 1) the length of the
+: -bgaudio AUDIO  2) the length given with -menu-length NUM.  For submenu
+: slideshows, it is determined by 1) '''-submenu-length''' NUM if given,  and
+: by 2) the length of the audio from '''-submenu-audio''' FILE(S).
+: 
+: See '''-menu-slide-total''' , '''-bgaudio''' , '''-menu-length''' ,
+: '''-submenu-length''', and '''-submenu-audio'''.
+: 
+: The 'crossfade' transition fades from one slide to another.  The 'fade'
+: transition fades in and out from and to black.  If you don't use this
+: option, the default is to use a 'crossfade' transition.
+: 
+; '''-slideshow-menu-thumbs''' FILES
+: Use the FILES instead of the 1st image in each slideshow as the
+: thumb that shows on the menu.  This option is for multiple slideshows
+: or mixed slideshow/video menus only.
+: 
+; '''-slides-to-bin''' FILES
+: FILES will be resized to 640x480 using a 'box' filter - this
+: is called 'binning'.  It will reduce the 'signal to noise' ratio for the
+: image in the animated slide menu.  Use this if you get some unwanted
+: effects for certain images, such as pixels shifting in what should be a
+: static image.  See also '''-slides-to-blur''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slides-to-blur''' FILES
+: FILES will be blurred a small amount - which will help on
+: slides that still have noise even after 'binning' with -slides-to-bin.
+: The default blur is 0x0.2 - you can increase this with
+: -slide-blur ARG.  See also '''-slides-to-bin''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-blur''' VALUE or LIST of VALUES [0x0.2]
+: The argument to use for blurring files.  It will be passed to
+: imagemagick: convert -blur ARG.  The format of the arg is {radius}x{sigma}
+: and the default is 0x0.2. Using values between 0x0.1 and 0x0.9 is probably
+: the best range.  Use a single value for all, or a list to have a different
+: blur for each file passed with '''-slides-to-blur'''.  You must pass in
+: '''-files-to-blur''' FILES to use this option.  Blurring can help 'noise'
+: problems in the video.  See also '''-slides-to-bin''' and '''-slide-border'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-border''' WIDTH [100]
+: Pad the slides with a border for the animated slide menu.  The default
+: without using an argument is 100.  Using this option can also solve some
+: noise/ringing effects if used alone or in conjunction with 'binning'
+: ('''-slides-to-bin''') or blurring ('''-slides-to-blur''').
+: 
+; '''-slide-frame''' WIDTH [12]
+: Frame the slides for the animated slideshow menu.  The default width
+: without using an  argument is 12.  See also '''-slide-frame-color'''
+: 
+; '''-slide-frame-color''', '''-slide-frame-colour'''
+: The color of the slide frame if passing '''-slide-frame'''.  The default if
+: you don't use this option is a color-safe white: rgb(235,235,235).
+: 
+; '''-showcase-slideshow'''
+: If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+: the animated slideshow as a showcase video.  It will be composed of slides
+: from each slideshow in the menu.  The thumb for each slideshow button will
+: be static.  If you used with a mixed menu of videos and slideshows, then
+: the video thumbs WILL be animated, so you may wish to use -static or
+: -textmenu with the option in that case.  If you want to use the
+: **-switched-menus option with a mixed menu leave this option out.
+: 
+; '''-background-slideshow''', '''-bg-slideshow'''
+: If doing multiple slideshows or mixed videos and slideshow(s), then use
+: the animated slideshow as a background video.  See '''-showcase-slideshow'''
+: for additional details.
+: 
+; '''-no-confirm-backup'''
+: Slideshows are an experimental (but well tested) feature.  Todisc is
+: unlikely to overwrite your personal files, but you should take precautions
+: and backup your images, as you would with any beta software.  Todisc
+: will prompt you to backup your files normally.  If you have already backed
+: up your images, use this option to disable the prompt.
+: See '''General Options'''
+: 
+; '''-use-dvd-slideshow''' [FILE CONFIG]
+: If you pass this option without an argument, tovid will use the
+: dvd-slideshow program to create the animated slide menu, assuming you have
+: this program installed.  The optional argument is the dvd-slideshow
+: configuration file  - if you don't use this argument tovid will create it
+: for you.  If you want to use the 'Ken Burns effect' - then the
+: configuration file argument is required.  Note: the configuration file will
+: override many of the above options for slideshows.
+
+=== Burning the disc ===
+
+; '''-burn'''
+: Prompt to burn the DVD directory on completion.
+: 
+; '''-device'''
+: Device to use for the burning program [ /dev/dvdrw ]
+: 
+; '''-speed'''
+: The speed to use for burning the disc.
+
+=== Advanced usage ===
+
+==== Options ====
+
+; '''-menu-length'''
+: The desired animated main menu length in seconds
+; '''-submenu-length'''
+: The desired submenu length.  This will also affect the length of submenu
+: audio for static submenus.  (Assuming that -submenu-audio was passed in).
+: The default is to use 10 seconds of audio for static menus.
+; '''-submenu-stroke''' COLOR
+: The color for the sub-menu font shadow
+; '''-submenu-title-color''', '''-submenu-title-colour'''
+: The fill color used for sub-menu title fonts
+; '''-submenu-titles'''
+: You can supply a list of titles here for sub-menus without the length
+: restrictions found in thumb titles.  Must equal number of videos
+; '''-chapters''' [ NUM | CHAPTER POINTS in HH:MM:SS ]
+: The number of chapters for each video (default: 6) OR
+: the actual chapter points in HH:MM:SS format.
+: Chapter points will be used for generating the submenu thumbs, and for
+: seeking with your DVD player.  You can pass in just one value that will
+: be used for all videos, or supply a list of values (number of chapters)
+: or time code strings.
+: 
+: If you just pass an integer for 'number of chapters', then tovid will
+: make the chapter points for you by dividing the video length by the number
+: you supply.  If using the '''-no-menu''' option, the INT passed in will be
+: the chapter interval in minutes, rather than the above formula.
+: 
+: If passing HH:MM:SS format you need to pass the string of chapter points for
+: each video and each string should have comma separated values.
+: Additionally, the first chapter should always start at 00:00:00 as
+: dvdauthor will add that if it is not there already.
+: 
+: To get your time codes, you can play your videos in mplayer and press 'o'
+: to see them on-screen.  I have found these to be very accurate in my short
+: tests.  For greater frame accuracy you could try loading the file in
+: avidemux and find the time codes for the frames you want.
+: 
+: If passing grouped chapters you need to join the chapters from all the
+: videos in a group with a '+' separator.  If you want to skip creating
+: chapters for a video in the group use '0' for its chapters.
+: 
+: Note: chapters for grouped videos should probably be passed in using the
+: above HH:MM:SS format. (Arbitrary chapters using just an INT for the # of
+: chapters is not guaranteed to work reliably in all cases for grouped videos
+: at the moment.)
+: 
+: Example for passing just number of chapters ( 4 videos ):
+<pre>
+    -chapters 5 2 4 8
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: Example of passing chapter points ( 4 videos ):
+<pre>
+    -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45 \
+    00:00:00,00:04:25.623,00:09:12,00:15:51 \
+    00:00:00,00:05:10,00:13:41,00:18:13.033 \
+    00:00:00,00:15:23.342,00:26:42.523
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: Example of passing grouped chapters using the '+' separator:
+<pre>
+    -chapters 00:00:00,00:05:34.41,00:12:54,00:20:45+00:04:23,00:09:35 \
+    00:00:00... etc.
+</pre>
+
+: 
+; '''-chapter-titles''' LIST
+: If you are using submenus, you can pass a list of titles for the
+: chapters.  Each title must be quoted, and the number of titles given
+: must equal the total number of chapters for all videos.  In other words
+: if you use -chapters 4 6 8 , you must give 18 chapter titles, in the same
+: order that the videos were passed in.  Note: if you are passing in options
+: on the command line to the 'tovid disc' GUI, you must repeat the option
+: '''-chapter-titles''' for each video, accompanied by its respective chapter
+: titles. (you can also choose to use this syntax for the todisc script.)
+: 
+; '''-chapter-font''' FONT
+: Use FONT as the font for submenu chapters.
+: 
+; '''-chapter-fontsize''' SIZE
+: Use SIZE as the pointsize for the chapters font.
+; '''-chapter-color''' COLOR
+: The color for the chapters font.
+; '''-chapter-stroke''' COLOR
+: The color for the chapters font shadow
+: 
+; '''-seek''' NUM | "NUM1 NUM2 NUM3 . . ."
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails (default: 2.0 seconds)
+: If a quoted string of values matching the number of videos is used, then
+: each video can use a different seek value
+: If using switched menus, the '''-seek''' value(s) will be used to generate
+: the showcase image that displays on switching to another video choice with
+: the up/down arrow keys.
+; '''-fast-seek'''
+: Use faster seek method for ffmpeg.  This is not as accurate as the default
+: method, and may produce grey frames.
+; '''-frame-safe'''  Instead of seeking and then outputting one frame for
+: previews and static menus, output 9 frames and choose the largest.  Not
+: frame accurate (may be as much as 9 frames off), but safer.  Choose this
+: if you are getting grey frames/thumbnails with some videos.  You can also
+: use it to try to get the 'best' frame.  This option
+: has no effect on submenus at present.
+; '''-showcase-seek''' NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating thumbnails for showcase video
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-bgvideo-seek''', '''-bg-video-seek''' NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating images for background video
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-bgaudio-seek''', **-bg-audio-seek NUM
+: Seek to NUM seconds before generating audio for bgaudio
+: (default: 2.0 seconds)
+; '''-group''' N VIDEO1 VIDEO2 . . .
+: Allow grouping videos in dvdauthor.xml, so they will play sequentially as
+: a group.  The videos passed in after the 'N' will be grouped with the 'Nth'
+: video. Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+    -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: 
+: will group these 3 videos with the 2nd video given with '''-files''', so that
+: they will play sequentially as one title.  Only one thumbnail and/or title
+: will appear on the menu for the group: it will be made from the 1st video
+: in the group.  In the above example if you passed:
+<pre>
+    -files foo.mpg bar.mpg baz.mpg -group 2 2.mpg 3.mpg 4.mpg
+</pre>
+
+: then the group will consist of bar.mpg  2.mpg, 3.mpg and 4.mpg, and only the
+: title and/or thumbnail for bar.mpg will appear in the menu.  You can use
+: '''-group''' more than once for multiple groups.  Be  sure to quote video
+: filenames if they contain  spaces.
+
+=== Menu Style ===
+
+; '''-menu-title-geo''' north|south|east|west|center [south]
+: The position of the menu title.  You may need to use -align as well if
+: you don't want your title covering other parts of your menu.  See
+: '''-align'''
+; '''-menu-title-offset''' OFFSET (+X+Y)
+: Move menu title by this offset from its N|S|E|W|Center position.  You
+: may need to use -align as well if you don't want your title covering other
+: parts of your menu.  See '''-align'''
+; '''-button-style''' line|rect|text|text-rect [line]
+: The style of button that you will see when you play the DVD.
+: "line" style underlines the title, "rect" draws a rectangle around the
+: thumb when you select it in the DVD player, "text" highlights the video
+: title text, and "text-rect" draws a rectangle around the title
+: text.
+; '''-title-color''', '''-title-colour''' COLOR
+: Color to use for the main menu title.  For list of supported colors do:
+: '''convert -list''' color.  HTML notation may be used: "#ff0000". See:
+: [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/color.php]
+; '''-title-stroke''' COLOR
+: Shadow color for the main menu's title font. Use "none" for transparent
+: outline  (see title-color).  Note: this is not a -stroke in the sense that
+: imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow (the font is drawn twice).  To get
+: a true imagemagick stroke see '''-title-font-deco'''
+; '''-title-font-deco''', '''-title-fontdeco''' "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"
+: Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+: ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+: outlines, gradient fills, and many others. See '''Usage notes'''
+; '''-titles-stroke''' COLOR
+: Shadow color for the thumb or textmenu video titles font. Use "none" for
+: transparent outline  (see '''-titles-color''').  Note: this is not a -stroke
+: in the sense that imagemagick uses the term, but a shadow
+: (the font is drawn twice).  To get a true imagemagick stroke,
+: see '''-titles-font-deco'''
+; '''-titles-font-deco''', '''-titles-fontdeco''' "IMAGEMAGICK STRING"
+: Sets the font decoration method to FONTDECORATION. It is used by the 'convert'
+: ImageMagick command to draw the menu text. You can add colored text
+: outlines, gradient fills, and others. See '''Usage notes''' for more info.
+; '''-highlight-color''', '''-highlight-colour'''
+: Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to navigate.
+; '''-select-color''', '''-select-colour'''
+: Color to use for the menu buttons that your DVD remote uses to select.
+; '''-text-mist'''
+: Put a semi-transparent misted background behind the text for the menu's
+: title, just slightly larger than the text area.
+; '''-text-mist-color''', '''-text-mist-colour''' COLOR
+: Color of the mist behind the menu's title (see title-color).
+; '''-text-mist-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the mist behind the menu's title - see '''-opacity'''
+; '''-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the menu title text
+; '''-titles-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for video titles
+; '''-submenu-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for submenu menu titles
+; '''-chapter-title-opacity'''
+: Opacity of the text for submenu chapter titles
+; '''-menu-audio-fade'''
+: Number of sec to fade given menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds)
+: If you use '''-menu-audio-fade''' 0 then the audio will not be faded.
+; '''-submenu-audio-fade'''
+: Number of secs to fade sub-menu audio in and out (default: 1.0 seconds).
+: See '''-menu-audio-fade'''
+; '''-intro''' VIDEO
+: Use a introductory video that will play before the main menu.
+: At present it must be a DVD compatible video at the correct resolution etc.
+: Only 4:3 aspect is supported: 16:9 will give unexpected results.
+
+==== Style options specific to showcase/textmenu arrangements ====
+
+; '''-text-start''' N
+: This option is for '''-textmenu''' menus.  The titles will start at the Nth
+: pixel from the top of the menu ( Y axis ).
+; '''-title-gap''' N
+: This option is for '''-textmenu''' menus.  The gap is the space between
+: titles vertically ( Y axis ).
+; '''-rotate''' DEGREES
+: Rotate the showcase image|video clockwise by DEGREES.
+: (default: if used without options, the rotate will be 5 degrees).  Note:
+: this will not turn a portait image into a landscape image!
+; '''-showcase-geo''' GEOMETRY
+: The position of the showcase image.  ( +X+Y  position )
+: For example: '''-showcase-geo''' +300+200
+; '''-wave''' default|GEOMETRY
+: Wave effect for showcase image|video.  Alters thumbs along a sine wave using
+: GEOMETRY. (default: no wave)
+: "default" will produce a wave arg of -20x556, which
+: produces a gentle wave with a small amount of distortion.
+: See: [http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/distorts/#wave] if you want
+: to try other values.
+; '''-showcase-shape'''  egg|oval|plectrum|arch|spiral|galaxy|flat-tube|normal
+: Apply a shaped transparency mask to showcase videos or images.
+: Note: if you wish to make your own mask PNGS you can put them in
+: $PREFIX/lib/tovid/masks/ or $HOME/.tovid/masks/ and use them on the
+: command line using the filename minus the path and extension.
+: No frame is used for shaped thumbs.
+; '''-showcase-framestyle'''  none|glass
+: For -showcase-* style template only
+: "none" will use the default frame method, using "convert -frame . . ."
+: "glass" will use mplayer to make frames, which gives an interesting
+: animated effect to the frames, and can be much faster ( especially if you
+: don't use '''-rotate''' or '''-wave''' as thumbs will not need to be processed
+: again after mplayer spits them out.  Note: you need to be using either
+: '''-showcase''' IMAGE or '''-showcase''' VIDEO for this "frame style" to work.
+; '''-showcase-frame-size''' PIXELS
+: The size of the showcase frame.  This value will be used for both width and
+: height for the 'thickness' of the frame.  This will also set the thickness
+: of the raised "frame" of the showcase thumb when you use '''-3d-showcase'''.
+: See also '''-thumb-frame-size''' and '''-showcase-frame-color'''
+; '''-showcase-frame-color''', '''-showcase-frame-colour''' PIXELS
+: The color of the showcase frame.  Use hexadecimal or named colors notation.
+: Remember to quote! ( '#ffac5f' ).
+; '''-3d-showcase''', '''-3dshowcase'''
+: This will give an illusion of 3D to the showcase thumb: dynamic lighting on
+: rounded thumbs, and a raised effect on rectangular thumbs.  Try it !
+
+=== Thumbnail Style ===
+
+; '''-user-thumbs''' IMAGE(S)
+: Supply your own images for menu buttons, rather than relying on todisc to
+: generate them from the video.  They must be the same aspect ratio as the
+: videos in the titleset (4:3 or 16:9), as todisc will resize them without
+: checking and cropping.  There must be on image for each thumb that will be
+: displayed on the menu (ie. one thumb for each video in a titleset).
+; '''-opacity''' [0-100] (default 100)
+: Opacity of thumbnail videos as a percentage (no percent sign).
+: Anything less than 100(%) is semi-transparent. Not recommended with dark
+: backgrounds.
+; '''-thumb-blur''', '''-blur''' NUM
+: The amount of feather blur to apply to the thumb-shape.  The default is 1.0
+: which will more or less keep the shape and produces transparency at the
+: edges.  Choose float or integer values between 0.1 and 2.0. 3D thumbs are
+: set to a tiny blur, so this option doesn't affect the '''-3dthumbs''' option.
+; '''-showcase-blur''' NUM
+: The amount of 'feather' blur to apply to the showcase image/video.  Choose
+: values between 0.1 and 2.0.  This option has no effect on '''-3d-showcase'''.
+: See '''-thumb-blur''' for more info.
+; '''-align''' DIRECTION
+: This will align  thumbs/titles in DIRECTION, which is a compass direction
+: as used by imagemagick: ie. north|south|east|west|northeast|northwest etc.
+: If '''-align''' south then menu title will align north, unless you manually
+: set one or both of '''-menu-title-geo''' or '''-menu-title-offset'''.
+: Only '''-align''' north|south|center has any effect on showcase with thumb,
+: or with the default montage arrangement of central thumbs. The most
+: apparent changes with be with textmenu, though with 2 column arrangements
+: only the north* and south* changes will show an effect.
+: 
+: Diagram:
+;    . northwest   north   northeast .
+;    .                               .
+;    . west        center       east .
+;    .                               .
+;    . southwest   south    souteast .
+; '''-thumb-mist''' [COLOR]
+: Use a mist behind thumbnails.  The optional argument is the color of the
+: mist.  This option helps with contrast.  Be sure to set the font color
+: to an appropriate color if using a colored mist, and/or use a bold font.
+; '''-titles-color''', '''-titles-colour''' COLOR
+: Color to use for the thumb or textmenu titles.  If your titles are not
+: clear enough or look washed out, try using a '''-titles-stroke''' that
+: is the same color as used with '''-titles-color'''  (see '''-title-color''')
+; '''-showcase-titles-align''' west|east (default: center [centre])
+: The default is to center the text above the thumbnails.  This option will
+: align the titles either to the left (west) or right (east).  Aligning west
+: gives more space to the titles.  Aligning east also does so, and as well
+: will facilitate using \n in your titles to achieve multi line titles.
+; '''-tile-3x1''', '''-tile3x1'''
+: Use a montage tile of 3x1 instead of the usual 2x2 for 3 videos
+: ie.
+: 
+: [movie1] [movie2] [movie3] instead of:
+: 
+: [movie1] [movie2]
+: 
+: [movie3]
+: 
+: This option only comes into play if the number of videos supplied equals 3
+: Otherwise it will be silently ignored. Not used for -showcase-* style.
+; '''-tile-4x1''', '''-tile4x1'''
+: Same as '''-tile-3x1''' above, except use tile of 4x1. (one row of 4 videos)
+; **-thumb-columns 3|4
+: Same as '''-tile-3x1''' and tile-4x1** above, except it accepts either '3'
+: (1 row of 3 thumbs), or '4' (one row of 4 thumbs) as an argument.  This
+: alternative was added to help compact the gui layout.
+; '''-rotate-thumbs''' DEGREE LIST ( list of degrees, one for each thumb )
+: Rotate thumbs the given amount in degrees - can be positive or negative.
+: There must be one value for each file given with '''-files'''.
+: If the values are not the same distance from zero, the thumbs will be of
+: different sizes as images are necessarily resized *after* rotating.  With
+: the default montage template - this will also resize the titles; with the
+: showcase template the titles will remain the same size. Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+    -rotate-thumbs -10 10 -10 10 -10  (for 5 files)
+</pre>
+
+: **Note: this option will not turn a portrait image into a landscape image!
+
+=== Dvdauthor options ===
+
+; '''-loop''' PAUSE
+: Pause in seconds at end of menu.  Use "inf" if you wish indefinite pause.
+: Note: using "inf" with '''-menu-fade''' will disable the fadeout portion of
+: the fade.  (default: "inf" for static menu, 10.0 seconds for animated.)
+; '''-playall'''
+: This option will create a button on the main menu that will allow going
+: right to the 1st title and playing all videos in succession before
+: returning to the main menu.  If doing titlesets you can use this within
+: the '''-vmgm''' ... '''-end-vmgm''' options to allow playing ALL titlesets.
+: (If you want also to have a playall button in each titleset you could use
+: this option between each '''-titleset''' ... '''-end-titleset''' option or put
+: it outside of the vmgm and titlset options as a global option.
+; '''-videos-are-chapters'''
+: A button will be made on the main menu for each video, which you can use as
+: a chapter button.  Selecting any video will play them all in order
+: starting with the selected one.
+; '''-chain-videos''' NUM | N1-NN
+: Without options this will chain all videos together so they play
+: sequentially without returning to the main menu, except for the last, which
+: will return.  You can also specify which videos you want to behave this way
+: by number or by a range. ( ie. '''-chain-videos''' 1 2 4-6 ).
+; '''-subtitle-lang''' "lang1 lang2 . . ."
+: This allows selectable subtitles in the DVD, assuming you have optional
+: subtitles muxed into your videos.  Use 2 character language codes.
+; '''-audio-channel''' "Video1_track Video2_track Video3_track . . ."
+: "VideoN_track" is the track number to use in a multi-track (multi-language)
+: mpeg: usually something like '''-audio-channel''' "1 0 1".  The 1st track is
+: 0, 2nd is 1 . . . etc.  If the tracks are 0. English 1.French, then the
+: above would make French the audio language on Video1 and Video3, and
+: English the audio language on Video2.  You can check the mpeg with
+: "mplayer -v . . .".
+; '''-audio-lang''' LANGUAGE CODES
+: Identify the audio tracks on the DVD.  These language codes are used for
+: each video in the titleset.  When you use the audio button on your DVD
+: remote the language name is displayed.  Example: '''-audio-lang''' en fr
+; '''-aspect''' 4:3|16:9
+: This will output a <video aspect WIDTH:HEIGHT /> tag for the dvdauthor
+: xml file.  It will affect all videos in the titleset.  Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+    -aspect 16:9
+</pre>
+
+; '''-widescreen''' nopanscan|noletterbox [nopanscan]
+: This will output a <video widescreen=nopanscan /> tag (for example)
+: for the dvdauthor xml file.  It will affect all videos in the titleset. Use
+: in conjunction with '''-aspect''' if your dvd player is cropping your videos.
+: Example:
+: 
+<pre>
+    -aspect 16:9 -widescreen
+</pre>
+
+; '''-quick-nav'''
+: This option will allow navigation of a menu with more than one titleset by
+: using the left and right arrow keys of your DVD remote.  When you press
+: this key the highlight will go the next or previous title.  If you are at
+: the end of a titleset the right key will go to the next titleset.  If you
+: are at the beginning of a titleset, the left key will go to the previous
+: titleset.  If no next or previous titleset it will cycle to the end or
+: beginning of the titlesets.
+; '''-outlinewidth''', '''-outline-width''' WIDTH
+: For spumux outlinewidth variable.  If there is a large gap between words in
+: a text button, this option may help.
+; '''-video-pause''' PAUSE (single value or list)
+: The pause in seconds after playing a video title.  This is useful for
+: slideshows: the 'slide' will remain on the screen for this length of time.
+: If you have grouped videos you should probably not pause the videos that
+: have a grouped title after it, but instead see '''-grouped-video-pause'''.
+: Note: if you provide a list of values they must be one for each video.
+; '''-group-video-pause''' PAUSE (single value or list)
+: The pause in seconds after a grouped video plays.  If you wish to pause
+: after the whole group finishes, then only use a value greater than zero
+: for the last video in the group.  If providing a list of values they must
+: equal the number of grouped videos.
+
+=== Usage notes ===
+
+The argument given to various *-font options that set the font to use must be
+one of the fonts listed by the command 'convert -list type'. Please note that
+many of your installed fonts may not be available; if you want to maximize the
+number of fonts available to todisc, download and run
+[http://www.cit.gu.edu.au/~anthony/anthony.html Anthony Thyssen's]
+[http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage/scripts/imagick_type_gen imagick_type_gen]
+script and run it like this:
+imagick_type_gen > ~/.magick/type.xml.
+If that doesn't work, try imagick_type_gen > ~/.magick/type.mgk.
+
+Or you can specify a ttf font file directly to the *-font options if you don't
+want to install fonts to ImageMagick.
+
+The *-stroke options in todisc are not a stroke in the sense that ImageMagick
+uses the term, but rather a font shadow (the text is drawn twice)  To get a
+truer Imagemagick -stroke try something like:
+-title-font-deco "-stroke black" (or -titles-font-deco "-stroke black").  The
+'''-fontdeco''' option is quite flexible and takes a lot of ImageMagick's
+''convert'' options. Please refer to the tovid
+[http://tovid.wikia.com/wiki/Making_a_DVD_with_text_menus wiki] and Anthony
+Thyssen's guide [[http://www.imagemagick.org/Usage]] for further explanation and examples.
+
+== Command:mpg ==
+
+'''tovid mpg''' converts arbitrary video files into (S)VCD/DVD-compliant
+MPEG format, suitable for burning to CD/DVD-R for playback on a
+standalone DVD player.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid mpg''' [''OPTIONS''] '''-in''' ''INFILE'' '''-out''' ''OUTPREFIX''
+
+Where ''INFILE'' is any multimedia video file, and ''OUTPREFIX'' is what
+you want to call the output file, minus the file extension. ''OPTIONS''
+are additional customizations, described below.
+
+By default, you will (hopefully) end up with an NTSC DVD-compliant
+MPEG-2 video file; if you burn this file to a DVD-R, it should be
+playable on most DVD players.
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid mpg -in foo.avi -out foo_encoded</tt>
+: Convert 'foo.avi' to NTSC DVD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+: 
+; <tt>tovid mpg -pal -vcd foo.avi -out foo_encoded</tt>
+: Convert 'foo.avi' to PAL VCD format, saving to 'foo_encoded.mpg'.
+
+=== Basic options ===
+
+; '''-v''', '''-version'''
+: Print tovid version number only, then exit.
+; '''-quiet'''
+: Reduce output to the console.
+; '''-fake'''
+: Do not actually encode; only print the commands (mplayer, mpeg2enc etc.)
+: that would be executed. Useful in debugging; have tovid give you the
+: commands, and run them manually.
+; '''-ffmpeg'''
+: Use ffmpeg for video encoding, instead of mplayer/mpeg2enc. Try this if
+: you have any problems with the default encoding method. Using this option,
+: encoding will be considerably faster. It can do almost everything that 
+: mpeg2enc does such as -filters and -subtitles by using a pipe from mplayer
+: though using these options will make encoding somewhat slower. The 
+: exceptions are some special options like -kvcd* -bdvd where you will still
+: need to use the default mpeg2enc option.
+
+==== Television standards ====
+
+; '''-ntsc'''
+: NTSC format video (USA, Americas) (default)
+; '''-ntscfilm'''
+: NTSC-film format video
+; '''-pal'''
+: PAL format video (Europe and others)
+
+==== Formats ====
+
+Standard formats, should be playable in most DVD players:
+
+; '''-dvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) DVD-compatible output (default)
+; '''-half-dvd'''
+: (352x480 NTSC, 352x576 PAL) Half-D1-compatible output
+; '''-svcd'''
+: (480x480 NTSC, 480x576 PAL) Super VideoCD-compatible output
+; '''-dvd-vcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VCD-on-DVD output
+; '''-vcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) VideoCD-compatible output
+
+Non-standard formats, playable in some DVD players:
+
+; '''-kvcd'''
+: (352x240 NTSC, 352x288 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing video CD
+; '''-kdvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) KVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+; '''-kvcdx3'''
+: (528x480 NTSC, 520x576 PAL) KVCDx3 specification
+; '''-kvcdx3a'''
+: (544x480 NTSC, 544x576 PAL) KVCDx3a specification (slightly wider)
+; '''-bdvd'''
+: (720x480 NTSC, 720x576 PAL) BVCD-enhanced long-playing DVD
+
+See [http://kvcd.net/ kvcd.net] for details on the KVCD specification. Please
+note that KVCD ("K Video Compression Dynamics") is the name of a compression
+scheme that can be applied to any MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 video, and has little to
+do with VCD ("Video Compact Disc"), which is the name of a standard video disc
+format.
+
+=== Advanced options ===
+
+==== Aspect ratios ====
+
+tovid automatically determines aspect ratio of the input video by playing it in
+mplayer. If your video plays with correct aspect in mplayer, you should not
+need to override the default tovid behavior.
+
+If mplayer does not play your video with correct aspect, you may provide an
+explicit aspect ratio in one of several ways:
+
+; '''-full'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 4:3'''
+; '''-wide'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 16:9'''
+; '''-panavision'''
+: Same as '''-aspect 235:100'''
+; '''-aspect''' ''WIDTH''''':'''''HEIGHT''
+: Custom aspect, where ''WIDTH'' and ''HEIGHT'' are integers.
+
+The above are the intended INPUT aspect ratio. tovid chooses an optimal output
+aspect ratio for the selected disc format (VCD, DVD, etc.) and does the
+appropriate letterboxing or anamorphic scaling. Use '''-widetv''' to encode
+for a widescreen monitor or TV.
+
+==== Video stream options ====
+
+; '''-quality''' ''NUM'' (default 6)
+: Desired output quality, on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 giving the best
+: quality at the expense of a larger output file. Default is 6. Output size
+: can vary by approximately a factor of 4 (that is, '''-quality 1''' output
+: can be 1/4 the size of '''-quality 10''' output). Your results may vary.
+: WARNING: With '''-quality 10''', the output bitrate may be too high for
+: your hardware DVD player to handle. Stick with 9 or lower unless you
+: have phenomenally good eyesight.
+: 
+: At present, this option affects both output bitrate and quantization (but
+: may, in the future, affect other quality/size-related attributes). Use
+: '''-vbitrate''' if you want to explicitly provide a maximum bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-vbitrate''' ''NUM''
+: Maximum bitrate to use for video (in kbits/sec). Must be within allowable
+: limits for the given format. Overrides default values. Ignored for VCD,
+: which must be constant bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-interlaced'''
+: Do interlaced encoding of the input video (top fields first). Use this
+: option if your video is  interlaced, and you want to preserve as much
+: picture quality as possible. This option is ignored for VCD, which
+: doesn't support it.
+: 
+: You can tell your source video is interlaced by playing it, and pausing
+: during a scene with horizontal motion; if you see a "comb" effect at the
+: edges of objects in the scene, you have interlaced video. Use this option
+: to encode it properly.
+: 
+: If you would prefer to have output in progressive format, use
+: '''-progressive'''. If you have a DV camera, use '''-interlaced_bf''' since
+: DV footage is generally bottom fields first.
+: 
+; '''-interlaced_bf'''
+: Do interlaced encoding of the input video (bottom fields first).
+: 
+; '''-deinterlace''', '''-progressive'''
+: Convert interlaced source video into progressive output video. Because
+: deinterlacing works by averaging fields together, some picture quality is
+: invariably lost. Uses an adaptive kernel deinterlacer (kerndeint), or,
+: if that's not available, the libavcodec deinterlacer (lavcdeint).
+: 
+; '''-mkvsub''' ''LANG'' (EXPERIMENTAL)
+: Attempt to encode an integrated subtitle stream (such as may be found in
+: Matroska .mkv files) in the given language code (eng, jpn, etc.) May work
+: for other formats.
+: 
+; '''-autosubs'''
+: Automatically include subtitle files with the same name as the input video.
+: 
+; '''-subtitles''' ''FILE''
+: Get subtitles from ''FILE'' and encode them into the video.  WARNING: This
+: hard-codes the subtitles into the video, and you cannot turn them off while
+: viewing the video. By default, no subtitles are loaded. If your video is
+: already compliant with the chosen output format, it will be re-encoded to
+: include the subtitles. This works with both -ffmpeg and the default,
+: mpeg2enc.
+: 
+; '''-dvd-subtitles''', '''-dvdsubs''' | ''FILE''
+: Get subtitles from ''FILE(S)'' and add them '''as a subtitle stream''' into the
+: video.  This allows selectable subtitles on your DVD. You can use more than
+: one file for multiple languages. Be sure to use the -subtitle-lang option
+: in 'tovid disc' so the name of the language will show up on the DVD instead
+: of 'UNKNOWN' or similar
+: 
+; '''-dvdsubs-only'''
+: Use this if you have an already complient MPEG and wish to add a subtitle
+: stream without re-encoding, using '''-dvdsubs''' ,
+: 
+; '''-dvdsubs-fontsize''' ''NUM'' [18]
+: The pointsize in pixels for DVD selectable subtitles. To affect this for
+: hard-coded subtitles ( '''-subtitles''' ) you will need to pass options to
+: the player via '''-mplayeropts''' or '''-mpvopts'''.
+: 
+; '''-type''' {live|animation|bw}
+: Optimize video encoding for different kinds of video. Use 'live' (default)
+: for live-action video, use 'animation' for cartoons or anime, and 'bw' for
+: black-and-white video.  This option currently only has an effect with
+: KVCD/KSVCD output formats; other formats may support this in the future.
+: 
+; '''-safe''' ''PERCENT''
+: Fit the video within a safe area defined by ''PERCENT''. For example,
+: '''-safe 90%''' will scale the video to 90% of the width/height of the output
+: resolution, and pad the edges with a black border. Use this if some of the
+: picture is cut off when played on your TV.  The percent sign is optional.
+: 
+; '''-filters''' {none,denoise,deblock,contrast,all} (default none)
+: Apply post-processing filters to enhance the video. If your input video is
+: very high quality, use 'none'. If your input video is grainy, use 'denoise';
+: if it looks washed out or faded, use 'contrast'. You can use multiple
+: filters separated by commas. To apply all filters, use 'all'. This works
+: with both mpeg2enc and -ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-fps''' ''RATIO''
+: Force input video to be interpreted as ''RATIO'' frames per second.  May be
+: necessary for some ASF, MOV, or other videos. ''RATIO'' should be an
+: integer ratio such as "24000:1001" (23.976fps), "30000:1001" (29.97fps), or
+: "25:1" (25fps). This option is temporary, and may disappear in future
+: releases. (Hint: To convert a decimal like 23.976 to an integer ratio, just
+: multiply by 1000, i.e. 23976:1000)
+: 
+; '''-crop''' ''WIDTH'':''HEIGHT'':''X'':''Y''
+: Crop a portion of the video ''WIDTH'' by ''HEIGHT'' in size, with the
+: top-left corner at ''X'', ''Y''.
+: 
+; '''-widetv'''
+: Always encode to 16:9 widescreen (only supported by '''-dvd''', '''-kdvd''',
+: '''-bdvd'''), for optimal viewing on a widescreen monitor or TV.
+
+==== Audio stream options ====
+
+; '''-normalize'''
+: Analyze the audio stream and then normalize the volume of the audio.
+: This is useful if the audio is too quiet or too loud, or you want to
+: make volume consistent for a bunch of videos. Similar to running
+: normalize without any parameters. The default is -12dB average level
+: with 0dB gain.
+: 
+; '''-amplitude''' ''NUM''[dB]
+: In addition to analyzing and normalizing, apply the gain to the audio
+: such that the 'average' (RMS) sound level is ''NUM''. Valid values
+: range 0.0 - 1.0, with 0.0 being silent and 1.0 being full scale. Use
+: ''NUM''dB for a decibel gain below full scale (the default without
+: -amplitude is -12dB).
+: 
+; '''-abitrate''' ''NUM''
+: Encode audio at ''NUM'' kilobits per second.  Reasonable values include
+: 128, 224, and 384. The default is 224 kbits/sec, good enough for most
+: encodings. The value must be within the allowable range for the chosen disc
+: format; Ignored for VCD, which must be 224.
+: 
+; '''-audiotrack''' ''NUM''
+: Encode the given audio track, if the input video has multiple audio tracks.
+: ''NUM'' is ''1'' for the first track, ''2'' for the second, etc. You may
+: also provide a list of tracks, separated by spaces or commas, for example
+: '''-audiotrack 3,1,2'''. Use '''tovid id''' on your source video to determine
+: which audio tracks it contains.
+: 
+; '''-downmix'''
+: Encode all audio tracks as stereo.  This can save space on your DVD if
+: your player only does stereo.  The default behavior of tovid is to use
+: the original number of channels in each track.  For aac audio, downmixing
+: is not possible: tovid runs a quick 1 frame test to try to downmix the
+: input track with the largest number of channels, and if it fails then it
+: will revert to the default behavior of using the original channels.
+
+==== Other options ====
+
+; '''-config''' ''FILE''
+: Read configuration from ''FILE'', containing 'tovid' alone on the first
+: line, and free-formatted (whitespace-separated) tovid command-line options
+: on remaining lines.
+: 
+; '''-force'''
+: Force encoding of already-compliant video or audio streams.
+: 
+; '''-overwrite'''
+: Overwrite any existing output files (with the same name as the given
+: '''-out''' option).
+: 
+; '''-priority''' {low|medium|high}
+: Sets the main encoding process to the given priority. With high priority,
+: it may take other programs longer to load and respond. With lower priority,
+: other programs will be more responsive, but encoding may take 30-40%
+: longer.  The default is high priority.
+: 
+; '''-discsize''' ''NUM''
+: When encoding, tovid automatically splits the output file into several
+: pieces if it exceeds the size of the target media. This option sets the
+: desired target DVD/CD-R size to ''NUM'' mebibytes (MiB, 2^20). By default,
+: splitting occurs at 700 for CD, 4300 for DVD. Use higher values at your
+: own risk. Use 650 or lower if you plan to burn to smaller-capacity CDs.
+: Doesn't work with the '''-ffmpeg''' option.
+: 
+; '''-fit''' ''NUM''
+: Fit the output file into ''NUM'' MiB. Rather than using default (or
+: specified) video bitrates, tovid will calculate the correct video bitrate
+: that will limit the final output size to ''NUM'' MiB. This is different
+: than '''-discsize''', which cuts the final file into ''NUM'' MiB pieces.
+: '''-fit''' makes sure that the file never exceeds ''NUM'' MiB. This works
+: with '''-ffmpeg''', but not with '''-vcd''' since VCDs have a standardized
+: constant bitrate.
+: 
+; '''-parallel'''
+: Perform ripping, encoding, and multiplexing processes in parallel using
+: named pipes. Maximizes CPU utilization and minimizes disk usage. Note that
+: this option simply does more tasks simultaneously, in order to make better
+: use of available CPU cycles; it's unrelated to multi-CPU processing (which
+: is done automatically anyway). Has no effect when '''-ffmpeg''' is used.
+: 
+; '''-update''' ''SECS''
+: Print status updates at intervals of ''SECS'' seconds. This affects how
+: regularly the progress-meter is updated. The default is once every five
+: seconds.
+: 
+; '''-mpv'''
+: Use mpv instead of mplayer. This option is experimental.
+: 
+; '''-mplayeropts''' ''OPTIONS''
+: Append ''OPTIONS'' to the mplayer command run during video encoding.  Use
+: this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+: manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail, so use
+: this with caution!
+: 
+; '''-mpvopts''' ''OPTIONS''
+: Append ''OPTIONS'' to the mpv command run during video encoding.  Use
+: this if you want to add specific video filters (documented in the mplayer
+: or mpv manual page). Overriding some options will cause encoding to fail,
+: so use this with caution!
+: 
+; '''-nofifo''' (EXPERIMENTAL)
+: Do not use a FIFO pipe for video encoding. If you are getting "Broken pipe"
+: errors with normal encoding, try this option.  WARNING: This uses lots of
+: disk space (about 2 GB per minute of video).
+: 
+; '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep the intermediate files after encoding. Usually, this means the audio
+: and video streams are kept (eg the .ac3 and .m2v files for an NTSC DVD).
+: This doesn't work with -parallel because the intermediate files are named
+: pipes, and not real files.
+: 
+; '''-slice''' ''START''-''END''
+: Encode a segment from ''START'' to ''END'' (in seconds). Only works with
+: -ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-from-gui'''
+: Put makempg into a fully non-interactive state, suitable for calling from
+: a gui.
+: 
+; '''-noask'''
+: Don't ask questions when choices need to be made. Assume reasonable
+: answers.
+
+== Command:id ==
+
+'''tovid id''' identifies each multimedia video file in a
+list, and reports its compliance with video disc standards such as VCD,
+SVCD, and DVD.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid id''' [''OPTIONS''] ''VIDEO_FILE(s)''
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid id foo.avi</tt>
+; <tt>tovid id -tabluar videos/*.mpg</tt>
+
+=== Options ===
+
+; '''-terse'''
+: Print raw video characteristics, no formatting. Helpful when
+: calling from other scripts.
+: 
+; '''-verbose'''
+: Print extra information from mplayer, tcprobe, and ffmpeg.
+: 
+; '''-accurate'''
+: Do lengthy play-time estimation by scanning through the entire video file.
+: Use this if the default behavior is giving you inaccurate play times.
+: 
+; '''-fast'''
+: Skip lengthy play-time estimation, and go with what mplayer reports
+: as being the video duration. Unlike pre-0.32 versions of tovid, this
+: is now the default behavior, and the '''-fast''' option doesn't do anything.
+: 
+; '''-tabular'''
+: Display output in a table format for easier comparison. Most useful
+: when identifying multiple video files.
+: 
+; '''-keepfiles'''
+: Keep temporary directory for debugging.
+: 
+; '''-isformat''' [''pal-dvd''|''ntsc-dvd''] (same syntax for vcd and svcd)
+: Check ''VIDEO_FILE'' for compliance with the given disc format.
+: If ''VIDEO_FILE'' matches the given format, then '''tovid id''' reports "true"
+: and exits successfully. Otherwise, '''tovid id''' reports "false" and exits
+: with status 1 (failure).  This checks and reports both vcd/svcd/dvd
+: and pal/ntsc.
+: 
+; '''-mpv'''
+: This option is mainly for testing. If you have only mpv installed instead
+: of mplayer, it is used automatically. With this option, you can have BOTH
+: installed and choose which one to use. (default: mplayer)
+
+=== Examples ===
+
+; <tt>tovid id -verbose homevideo.avi</tt>
+: Report everything mplayer, ffmpeg, and transcode can determine about
+: homevideo.avi.
+: 
+; <tt>tovid id -isformat dvd homevideo.mpg</tt>
+: Check to see if homevideo.mpg is compliant with the DVD standard.
+
+== Command:dvd ==
+
+'''tovid dvd''' takes a DVD directory as generated by tovid with 'tovid disc' or
+one of the GUI frontends like 'tovid gui' or 'tovid titlesets' and burns
+it to appropriate media.  This will also work if the DVD directory is
+generated by the dvdauthor backend that tovid also uses.
+
+Running this program may slow down your other applications, due to intense
+disk activity.
+
+=== Usage ===
+
+'''tovid dvd''' [''OPTIONS''] ''DVD_DIR''
+
+For example:
+
+; <tt>tovid dvd /path/to/DVD/directory</tt>
+
+=== Options ===
+
+; '''-burn'''
+: Burn a DVD file-system in ''DVD_DIR'' (must contain a VIDEO_TS folder).
+: This option is currently not necessary as the makedvd script ONLY burns
+: now that legacy scripts like makexml have been removed.  Left for
+: compatibility only.
+: 
+; '''-eject'''
+: Eject the DVD tray after burning is complete. By default, the DVD is not
+: ejected.
+: 
+; '''-device''' ''DEVICE'' (default /dev/dvdrw)
+: Burn the disc image to ''DEVICE'', the Linux device file-system
+: name of your DVD-recorder. Common examples might be /dev/dvdrw,
+: /dev/scd1, and /dev/hdc. You can also use a bus/id/lun triple
+: such as ATAPI:0,1,0
+: 
+; '''-speed''' ''NUM'' (default 1)
+: Burn disc at speed ''NUM''.
+: 
+; '''-label''' ''DISC_LABEL''
+: Uses ''DISC_LABEL'' as the volume ID. This appears as the mount
+: name of the disc on some computer platforms. Must be <=32
+: alphanumeric digits without spaces.
+: 
+; '''-quiet'''
+: Limit output to essential messages.
+: 
+; '''-noask'''
+: Don't ask interactive questions and assume answers that will continue
+: execution.
+
+    After burning, the DVD can be previewed by calling:
+    '''''xine''' dvd:/path/to/output/directory''
+    or:
+    '''''vlc''' /path/to/output/directory''
+
+== Command:chapters ==
+
+'''tovid chapters''' will start a GUI using mplayer to set chapter points in a
+video.  If the video plays through and you want to add more chapters you can
+press the play button again, but remember that new chapter points will be
+appended (in correct sequential order).  It will display the resulting chapter
+points, and also output to a terminal (useful for scripts).  As well it will
+give the option of saving the chapters string to a text file.
+
+Note that the 'tovid gui' now features a similar widget when you press the
+chapters button on the opening page.
+
+=== Examples ===
+
+; <tt>tovid chapters foo.avi</tt>
+: 
+; <tt>chapters=$(tovid chapters /home/grepper/videos/foo.avi)</tt>
+
+== CONTACT ==
+
+For further assistance, contact information, forum and IRC links,
+please refer to the [http://tovid.wikia.com/ tovid homepage].
+
+<!-- wiki code generated by txt2tags 2.6 (http://txt2tags.org) -->
+<!-- cmdline: txt2tags -t wiki -\-toc -\-toc-level 2 docs/src/en/tovid.t2t -->
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/libtovid/metagui/gui.py -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/libtovid/metagui/gui.py Changed

 
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@
         # Hack: This is broken (commented section), presumably because of
         # load_args limitations. This hack fixes it for libtovid, but does not
         # belong in metagui.  So refactor this when load_args is fixed.
-        # see http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/detail?id=121
+        # see https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues/121
         filename = askopenfilename(parent=self,
             title="Select a shell script or text file to load",
             filetypes=[('Shell scripts', '*.sh *.bash'),
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@
 
     def load_script(self, filename):
         # this is now disabled and its functionality passed to guis.helpers.py
-        # see http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/detail?id=121
+        # see https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues/121
         pass
         #"""Load current Control settings from a text file.
         #"""
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/setup.py -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/setup.py Changed

 
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 # Current SVN version number
 #_tovid_version = svn_version()
 # Official release number
-_tovid_version = '0.35'
+_tovid_version = '0.35.0'
 
 
 import os
@@ -194,8 +194,12 @@
     version = _tovid_version, # Defined at the top of this file
     url = 'http://tovid.wikia.com/',
     license = 'GPL',
-    maintainer = 'Eric Pierce',
-    maintainer_email = 'wapcaplet88@gmail.com',
+    maintainer = 'grepper',
+    maintainer_email = 'grepper@gmail.com',
+    description = 'A suite of tools for making video DVDs',
+    platforms = 'Linux',
+    download_url = 'https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/',
+    long_description = 'A suite of tools for making video DVDs',
 
     cmdclass = {
         'install': InstallCommand,
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/makedvd -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/makedvd Changed

 
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
     echo "$@"
     echo "See if anything in the above output helps you diagnose the"
     echo "problem, and please file a bug report at:"
-    echo "   http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues"
+    echo "   https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues"
     echo "(_not_ the dvdauthor list) containing the above output."
     echo "Sorry for the inconvenience!"
     echo "!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!"
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/makempg -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/makempg Changed

 
@@ -810,7 +810,7 @@
         echo "See the manual ('man tovid') for more information and options."
         echo
         echo "Please report bugs to:"
-        echo "   http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/list"
+        echo "   https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues"
         yecho "Thanks for using tovid!"
         yecho
     fi
​

tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/mpv_identify.sh Added

@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# file identification script
+#
+# manual usage:
+# mpv_identify.sh foo.mkv
+#
+# sh/dash/ksh/bash usage:
+# . mpv_identify.sh FOO_ foo.mkv
+# will fill properties into variables like FOO_length
+#
+# zsh usage:
+# mpv_identify() { emulate -L sh; . mpv_identify.sh "$@"; }
+# mpv_identify FOO_ foo.mkv
+# will fill properties into variables like FOO_length
+#
+# When multiple files were specified, their info will be put into FOO_* for the
+# first file, FOO_1_* for the second file, FOO_2_* for the third file, etc.
+#
+# Note: this script appears without a COPYRIGHT header in the mpv source
+# according to the mpv COPYRIGHT:
+# "Files without Copyright notice are licensed as LGPLv2+."
+
+__midentify__main() {
+
+ case "$0" in
+ mpv_identify.sh|*/mpv_identify.sh)
+ # we are NOT being sourced
+ [ -n "$1" ] && set -- '' "$@"
+ ;;
+ esac
+
+ if [ "$#" -lt 2 ]; then
+ cat >&2 <<EOF
+Usage 1 (for humans only): $0 filename.mkv
+will print all property values.
+Note that this output really shouldn't be parsed, as the
+format is subject to change.
+
+Usage 2 (for use by scripts): see top of this file
+
+NOTE: for mkv with ordered chapters, this may
+not always identify the specified file, but the
+file providing the first chapter. Specify
+--no-ordered-chapters to prevent this.
+EOF
+ return 2
+ fi
+
+ local LF="
+"
+
+ local nextprefix="$1"
+ shift
+
+ if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+ # in case of error, we always want this unset
+ unset "${nextprefix}path"
+ fi
+
+ local allprops="
+ filename
+ path
+ stream-start
+ stream-end
+ stream-length
+
+ demuxer
+
+ length
+ chapters
+ editions
+ titles
+
+ audio
+ audio-bitrate
+ audio-codec
+ audio-format
+ channels
+ samplerate
+
+ video
+ angle
+ video-bitrate
+ video-codec
+ video-format
+ video-aspect
+ fps
+ width
+ height
+ dwidth
+ dheight
+
+ sub
+ "
+ # TODO add metadata support once mpv can do it
+
+ local propstr="X-MIDENTIFY-START:$LF"
+ local key
+ for key in $allprops; do
+ propstr="${propstr}X-MIDENTIFY: $key \${=$key}$LF"
+ key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+ unset "$nextprefix$key"
+ done
+
+ local fileindex=0
+ local prefix=
+ local line
+ while IFS= read -r line; do
+ case "$line" in
+ X-MIDENTIFY-START:)
+ if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+ prefix="$nextprefix"
+ if [ "$fileindex" -gt 0 ]; then
+ nextprefix="${prefix%${fileindex}_}"
+ fi
+ fileindex="$((fileindex+1))"
+ nextprefix="${nextprefix}${fileindex}_"
+ for key in $allprops; do
+ key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+ unset "$nextprefix$key"
+ done
+ else
+ if [ "$fileindex" -gt 0 ]; then
+ printf '\n'
+ fi
+ fileindex="$((fileindex+1))"
+ fi
+ ;;
+ X-MIDENTIFY:\ *)
+ local key="${line#X-MIDENTIFY: }"
+ local value="${key#* }"
+ key="${key%% *}"
+ key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+ if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+ if [ -z "$prefix" ]; then
+ echo >&2 "Got X-MIDENTIFY: without X-MIDENTIFY-START:"
+ elif [ -n "$value" ]; then
+ eval "$prefix$key"='"$value"'
+ fi
+ else
+ if [ -n "$value" ]; then
+ printf '%s=%s\n' "$key" "$value"
+ fi
+ fi
+ ;;
+ esac
+ done <<EOF
+echo $propstr
+
+$(${MPV:-mpv} --term-playing-msg="$propstr" --vo=null --ao=null \
+ --frames=1 --quiet --no-cache --no-config -- "$@")
+EOF
+}
+
+__midentify__main "$@"
+
+echo Running mpv --term-playing-msg="$propstr" --vo=null --ao=null --frames=1 --quiet --no-cache --no-config -- "$@" >&2

 
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# file identification script
+#
+# manual usage:
+#   mpv_identify.sh foo.mkv
+#
+# sh/dash/ksh/bash usage:
+#   . mpv_identify.sh FOO_ foo.mkv
+# will fill properties into variables like FOO_length
+#
+# zsh usage:
+#   mpv_identify() { emulate -L sh; . mpv_identify.sh "$@"; }
+#   mpv_identify FOO_ foo.mkv
+# will fill properties into variables like FOO_length
+#
+# When multiple files were specified, their info will be put into FOO_* for the
+# first file, FOO_1_* for the second file, FOO_2_* for the third file, etc.
+#
+# Note: this script appears without a COPYRIGHT header in the mpv source
+# according to the mpv COPYRIGHT:
+# "Files without Copyright notice are licensed as LGPLv2+."
+
+__midentify__main() {
+
+    case "$0" in
+        mpv_identify.sh|*/mpv_identify.sh)
+            # we are NOT being sourced
+            [ -n "$1" ] && set -- '' "$@"
+            ;;
+    esac
+
+    if [ "$#" -lt 2 ]; then
+        cat >&2 <<EOF
+Usage 1 (for humans only): $0 filename.mkv
+will print all property values.
+Note that this output really shouldn't be parsed, as the
+format is subject to change.
+
+Usage 2 (for use by scripts): see top of this file
+
+NOTE: for mkv with ordered chapters, this may
+not always identify the specified file, but the
+file providing the first chapter. Specify
+--no-ordered-chapters to prevent this.
+EOF
+        return 2
+    fi
+
+    local LF="
+"
+
+    local nextprefix="$1"
+    shift
+
+    if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+        # in case of error, we always want this unset
+        unset "${nextprefix}path"
+    fi
+
+    local allprops="
+        filename
+        path
+        stream-start
+        stream-end
+        stream-length
+
+        demuxer
+
+        length
+        chapters
+        editions
+        titles
+
+        audio
+        audio-bitrate
+        audio-codec
+        audio-format
+        channels
+        samplerate
+
+        video
+        angle
+        video-bitrate
+        video-codec
+        video-format
+        video-aspect
+        fps
+        width
+        height
+        dwidth
+        dheight
+
+        sub
+    "
+    # TODO add metadata support once mpv can do it
+
+    local propstr="X-MIDENTIFY-START:$LF"
+    local key
+    for key in $allprops; do
+        propstr="${propstr}X-MIDENTIFY: $key \${=$key}$LF"
+        key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+        unset "$nextprefix$key"
+    done
+
+    local fileindex=0
+    local prefix=
+    local line
+    while IFS= read -r line; do
+        case "$line" in
+            X-MIDENTIFY-START:)
+                if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+                    prefix="$nextprefix"
+                    if [ "$fileindex" -gt 0 ]; then
+                        nextprefix="${prefix%${fileindex}_}"
+                    fi
+                    fileindex="$((fileindex+1))"
+                    nextprefix="${nextprefix}${fileindex}_"
+                    for key in $allprops; do
+                        key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+                        unset "$nextprefix$key"
+                    done
+                else
+                    if [ "$fileindex" -gt 0 ]; then
+                        printf '\n'
+                    fi
+                    fileindex="$((fileindex+1))"
+                fi
+                ;;
+            X-MIDENTIFY:\ *)
+                local key="${line#X-MIDENTIFY: }"
+                local value="${key#* }"
+                key="${key%% *}"
+                key="$(printf '%s\n' "$key" | tr - _)"
+                if [ -n "$nextprefix" ]; then
+                    if [ -z "$prefix" ]; then
+                        echo >&2 "Got X-MIDENTIFY: without X-MIDENTIFY-START:"
+                    elif [ -n "$value" ]; then
+                        eval "$prefix$key"='"$value"'
+                    fi
+                else
+                    if [ -n "$value" ]; then
+                        printf '%s=%s\n' "$key" "$value"
+                    fi
+                fi
+                ;;
+        esac
+    done <<EOF
+echo $propstr
+
+$(${MPV:-mpv} --term-playing-msg="$propstr" --vo=null --ao=null \
+              --frames=1 --quiet --no-cache --no-config -- "$@")
+EOF
+}
+
+__midentify__main "$@"
+
+echo Running mpv --term-playing-msg="$propstr" --vo=null --ao=null --frames=1 --quiet --no-cache --no-config -- "$@" >&2
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/pytovid -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/pytovid Changed

 
@@ -119,6 +119,6 @@
     print(' ')
     print("Done encoding '%s' to '%s.mpg'" % (options['in'], options['out']))
     print(' ')
-    print("Please report bugs to http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/list")
+    print("Please report bugs to https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues")
     print("Thanks for using pytovid!")
 
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/tovid-init -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/tovid-init Changed

 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 #set -u
 
 # Suite version
-TOVID_VERSION="0.35"
+TOVID_VERSION="0.35.0"
 
 # String used to separate blocks of output
 SEPARATOR="========================================================="
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
 TOVID_HOME="$HOME/.tovid"
 TOVID_HOME_PAGE="http://tovid.wikia.com"
 TOVID_FORUMS="http://groups.google.com/group/tovid-users"
-TOVID_ISSUES="http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/list"
+TOVID_ISSUES="https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues"
 
 # ******************************************************************************
 # ******************************************************************************
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/tovid-init.in -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/tovid-init.in Changed

 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
 TOVID_HOME="$HOME/.tovid"
 TOVID_HOME_PAGE="http://tovid.wikia.com"
 TOVID_FORUMS="http://groups.google.com/group/tovid-users"
-TOVID_ISSUES="http://code.google.com/p/tovid/issues/list"
+TOVID_ISSUES="https://github.com/tovid-suite/tovid/issues"
 
 # ******************************************************************************
 # ******************************************************************************
​

tovid-0.35.tar.gz/src/tovid-test -> tovid-0.35.0.tar.gz/src/tovid-test Changed

 
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@
         OUTFILE="$DEFAULT_OUTFILE"
         rm -f "$OUTFILE"
     fi
-    CMD="tovid $@ -overwrite -out $OUTFILE"
+    CMD="tovid mpg $@ -overwrite -out $OUTFILE"
     $TEST_FFMPEG && CMD="$CMD -ffmpeg"
     yecho $CMD
     if $DEBUG; then
​

tovid-rpmlintrc Deleted

 
@@ -1,1 +0,0 @@
-addFilter("python-naming-policy-not-applied")
​

Build Results
RPM Lint

Refresh

No build results available

Refresh

No rpmlint results available

Comments for request 1798 0

Request History

Aloysius created request about 10 years ago

Tarball from new repository plus a few minor changes.

mrdocs accepted request about 10 years ago

ok, nice clean up